B. Tech Nanotechnology

Home , Nanocircuitry, Nanoring, Supramolecular assembly

FACULTY OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY

CURRICULUM, PRE-REQUISITES/ CO-REQUISITES CHART, AND SYLLABUS FOR B.TECH UNDER CHOICE BASED FLEXIBLE CREDIT SYSTEM REGULATIONS 2015 (For students admitted from 2015-16 onwards)

Specialization : Nanotechnology Offering Department : Physics and Nanotechnology

Placed in the 32nd Academic Council Meeting held on 23rd July 2016

CONTENTS

COURSE PAGE TOPIC / COURSE TITLE CODE NUMBER Student Outcomes And C-D-I-O iv Symbols and Abbreviations v Curriculum – Core Courses vi Curriculum – Elective Courses viii Pre/Co Requisites List ix Pre/Co Requisites Flow Chart xi YEAR – I, SEMESTER - II 15NT101 Elements of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology 1 YEAR – II, SEMESTER - I 15NT201 Fundamentals of Solid State Engineering 3 15NT202 Nanoscale Chemistry 5 15NT202L Nanoscale Chemistry Laboratory 7 15NT203J Micro/Nanoscale Imaging and Analysis 8 YEAR – II SEMESTER - II 15NT204 Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics for Nano Systems 11 15NT205 Quantum Mechanics for Nanotechnologists 14 15NT206 Biological Principles for Nanoscale Science and Engineering 16 15NT207 Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale Materials 18 15NT207L Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale Materials Laboratory 20 YEAR – III, SEMESTER - I 15NT301 Nanophotonics 21 15NT302 Nanotoxicology and Nanotechnology Engineering Practice 23 15NT303 Nanobiotechnology 25 15NT303L Nanobiotechnology Laboratory 27 15NT375L Minor Project I 28

15NT380L Seminar I 30 15NT385L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) I 32 15NT390L Internship / Industrial Training I 33 15NT490L Industry Module I 34 YEAR – III, SEMESTER - II 15NT304 Nanoelectronics 35 15NT304L Nanoelectronics Simulation Laboratory 37 15NT305 Micro and Nanofabrication 38 15NT305L Micro and Nanofabrication Laboratory 40 YEAR – IV, SEMESTER - I 15NT401M Multi-Disciplinary Design 41 15NT403 Nanomagnetism 43 15NT404 Polymer and Nanocomposites 45 15NT404L Polymer and Nanocomposites Laboratory 47 15NT405 Industrial Nanotechnology 48

i NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015 COURSE PAGE TOPIC / COURSE TITLE CODE NUMBER 15NT376L Minor Project II 50 15NT381L Seminar II 52 15NT386L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) II 54 15NT391L Internship / Industrial Training II 55 15NT491L Industry Module II 56 YEAR – IV, SEMESTER - II 15NT496L Major Project 57 ELECTIVE COURSES Department Elective – I, II, III & IV 15NT301E Carbon Nanotechnology 59 15NT302E Physics of Solid State Devices 61 15NT303E Molecular Spectroscopy and its Applications 63 15NT304E Nanotribology 65 15NT305E Nanotechnology Legal Aspects 67 15NT306E Lithography Techniques and Fabrication 69 15NT307E Smart Sensor Systems 71 15NT308E 2-D Layered Nanomaterials 73 15NT309E Supramolecular Systems 75 15NT310E MEMS and NEMS 77 15NT311E Surface and Interfaces 79 15NT312E Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Processing 82 15NT313E Advanced Drug Delivery Systems 84 15NT314E Nanomedicine 86 15NT315E Microelectronics and VLSI 88 15NT316E Introduction to Scientific Research 90 15NT317E Nanocatalysts 92 15NT321E Nano and Micro Emulsions 94 Department Elective – V & VI 15NT401E Nanorobotics 96 15NT402E Micro and Nanofluidics 98 15NT403E Nanotechnology for Energy Systems 100 15NT404E Photovoltaic Technology 102 15NT405E Nanotechnology in Cosmetics 104 15NT406E Green Nanotechnology 106 15NT407E Nanocomputing 108 15NT408E Nanotechnology in Textiles 110 15NT409E Cancer Nanotechnology 112 15NT410E Polymer Engineering 114 15NT411E Atomistic Modeling 116

ii NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015 COURSE PAGE TOPIC / COURSE TITLE CODE NUMBER 15NT412E Societal Implications of Nanotechnology 118 15NT413E Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering 120 Courses Customised to Other Departments (EIE) 15NT318E Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics 122 Courses offered/ customized by Other Departments to B.Tech. Nanotechnology 15EI251 Electronics and Instrumentation 124 15EI251L Electronics and Instrumentation Laboratory 126 15ME216 Introduction to Manufacturing Engineering 127 15MH311 Elements of Mechatronics Systems 129 15MH312L Mechatronics Systems Laboratory 131

iii NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015 STUDENT OUTCOMES

The curriculum and syllabus for B.Tech programs (2013) conform to outcome based teaching learning process. In general, ELEVEN STUDENT OUTCOMES (a-k) have been identified and the curriculum and syllabus have been structured in such a way that each of the courses meets one or more of these outcomes. Student outcomes describe what students are expected to know and be able to do by the time of graduation. These relate to the skills, knowledge, and behaviors that students acquire as they progress through the program. Further each course in the program spells out clear instructional objectives which are mapped to the student outcomes. The student outcomes are: (a) an ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering (b) an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data (c) an ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability (d) an ability to function on multidisciplinary teams (e) an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems (f) an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility (g) an ability to communicate effectively (h) the broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in global, economic, environmental, and societal context (i) a recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning (j) a knowledge of contemporary issues (k) an ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice.

C-D-I-O Initiative The CDIO Initiative (CDIO is a trademarked initialism for Conceive — Design — Implement — Operate) is an innovative educational framework for producing the next generation of engineers. The framework provides students with an education stressing engineering fundamentals set in the context of Conceiving — Designing — Implementing — Operating real-world systems and products. Throughout the world, CDIO Initiative collaborators have adopted CDIO as the framework of their curricular planning and outcome-based assessment. In the syllabus, every topic has been classified under one or more of C-D-I-O so that students and faculty alike are clear about the scope of learning to take place under each one of the topics.

iv NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

B -- Courses under Basic Science and Mathematics BT -- Biotechnology Courses C-D-I-O -- Conceive-Design-Implement-Operate CE -- Civil Engineering Courses CS -- Computer Science and Engineering Courses CY -- Chemistry Courses E with course code -- Elective Courses E -- Courses under Engineering Sciences EC -- Electronics and Communication Engineering Courses EE -- Electrical and Electronics Engineering Courses EI -- Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Courses G -- Courses under Arts and Humanities IOs -- Instructional Objectives J with course code -- Theory cum Laboratory courses L -- Laboratory / Project / Industrial Training Courses LE -- Language Courses L-T-P-C -- L- Lecture Hours Per Week T- Tutorial Hours Per Week P- Practical Hours Per Week C- Credits for a Course M with course code -- Courses with Multi-Disciplinary Content MA -- Mathematics Courses ME -- Mechanical Engineering Courses MH -- Mechatronics Engineering Courses MOOCs -- Massive Open Online Courses NC -- NCC- National Cadet Corps NS -- NSS – National Service Scheme NT -- Nanotechnology Courses P -- Professional Core Courses PD -- Personality Development Courses PY -- Physics Courses SO/SOs -- Student Outcomes (a-k) SP -- NSO- National Sports Organization YG -- Yoga Course

v NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

PRE/CO REQUISITES LIST B. Tech Nanotechnology Under Choice Based Flexible Credit System (CBFCS) - for students admitted from the academic year 2015 - 2016 onwards Prerequisite Co requisite Course Code Course Title course courses 15NT101 Elements of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT201 Fundamentals of Solid State Engineering Nil Nil 15NT202 Nanoscale Chemistry Nil Nil 15NT202L Nanoscale Chemistry Laboratory Nil 15NT202 15NT203J Micro/Nanoscale Imaging and Analysis Nil Nil 15NT204 Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics for Nano Nil Nil Systems 15NT205 Quantum Mechanics for Nanotechnologists Nil Nil 15NT206 Biological Principles for Nanoscale Science and Nil Nil Engineering Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale 15NT202 Nil 15NT207 Materials Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale Nil 15NT207 15NT207L Materials Laboratory 15NT301 Nanophotonics Nil Nil 15NT302 Nanotoxicology and Nanotechnology Engineering Nil Nil Practice 15NT303 Nanobiotechnology 15NT206 Nil 15NT303L Nanobiotechnology Laboratory Nil 15NT303 15NT304 Nanoelectronics 15NT201 Nil 15NT304L Nanoelectronics Simulation Laboratory Nil 15NT304 15NT305 Micro and Nanofabrication Nil Nil 15NT305L Micro and Nanofabrication Laboratory Nil 15NT305 15NT401M Multi-Disciplinary Design Course 15NT403 Nanomagnetism Nil Nil 15NT404 Polymer and Nanocomposites Nil Nil 15NT404L Polymer and Nanocomposites Laboratory Nil 15NT404 15NT405 Industrial Nanotechnology Nil Nil

Department Elective – I, II, III &IV 15NT301E Carbon Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT302E Physics of Solid State Devices Nil Nil 15NT303E Molecular Spectroscopy and its Applications Nil Nil 15NT304E Nanotribology Nil Nil 15NT305E Nanotechnology Legal Aspects Nil Nil 15NT306E Lithography Techniques and Fabrication Nil Nil 15NT307E Smart Sensor Systems Nil Nil 15NT308E 2-D Layered Nanomaterials Nil Nil 15NT309E Supramolecular Systems Nil Nil 15NT310E Mems and Nems Nil Nil 15NT311E Surface and Interfaces Nil Nil 15NT312E Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Processing Nil Nil 15NT313E Advanced Drug Delivery Systems Nil Nil 15NT314E Nanomedicine Nil Nil 15NT315E Microelectronics and VLSI Nil Nil 15NT316E Introduction to Scientific Research Nil Nil 15NT317E Nanocatalysts Nil Nil 15NT321E Nano and Micro Emulsions Nil Nil

ix Department Elective – V, Vi 15NT401E Nanorobotics 15MH311 Nil 15NT402E Micro and Nanofluidics Nil Nil 15NT403E Nanotechnology for Energy Systems Nil Nil 15NT404E Photovoltaic Technology Nil Nil 15NT405E Nanotechnology in Cosmetics Nil Nil 15NT406E Green Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT407E Nanocomputing Nil Nil 15NT408E Nanotechnology in Textiles Nil Nil 15NT409E Cancer Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT410E Polymer Engineering Nil Nil 15NT411E Atomistic Modeling 15NT205 Nil 15NT412E Societal Implications of Nanotechnology Nil Nil 15NT413E Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering Nil Nil Course Offered/ Customised to E&I Department 15NT318E Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics Nil Nil Course Offered/Customised by other Departments to

B.Tech. Nanotechnology 15EI251 Electronics and Instrumentation Nil Nil 15EI251L Electronics and Instrumentation Laboratory Nil 15EI251 15MH311 Elements of Mechatronics Systems Nil Nil 15MH312L Mechatronics Systems Laboratory Nil 15MH311 15ME216 Introduction to Manufacturing Engineering Nil Nil

Note: Few Core/Elective courses will be listed as Open Electives for other departments based on the availability of resources and demand

B. TECH NANOTECHNOLOGY PREREQUISITES AND CO REQUISITES FLOW CHART Under Choice Based Flexible Credit System (CBFCS) - for students admitted from the academic year 2015 - 2016 onwards

15LE101 2 Cr 15PD101 1 Cr 15MA101 4 Cr 15PY101 3 Cr 15PY101L 1 Cr 15CY101 3 Cr 15CY101L 1 Cr 15BT101 2 Cr 15CE101 2 Cr 15EE101 2 Cr 15ME105L 3 Cr 15CS101L 2 Cr

SEMESTER 1

Calculus and Solid Basic Electrical English Soft Skills - I Physics Physics Laboratory Chemistry Chemistry Laboratory Biology for Engineers Basic Civil Engineering Engineering Graphics Programming Laboratory Geometry Engineering

15NC101/ 15NS101/ 15LE102 2 Cr 15PD102 1 Cr 1 Cr 15MA102 4 Cr 15PY102L 3 Cr 15CY102 2 Cr 15ME101 2 Cr 15EC101 2 Cr 15ME104L 2 Cr 15NT101 3 Cr 15SP101/ 15YG101 SEMESTER 2 NCC - National Cadet Corps / NSS- National Advanced Calculus and Principles of Environmental Basic Mechanical Basic Electronics Elements of Nanoscience Value Education Soft Skills - II Service Scheme / NSO- Materials Science Workshop Practice Complex Analysis Science Engineering Engineering and Nanotechnology National Sports Organization / Yoga

15LE201E/ 15LE202E/ 15LE203E/ 2 Cr 15PD201 1 Cr 15MA202 4 Cr 15EI251 3 Cr 15EI251L 1 Cr 15NT201 3 Cr 15NT202 3 Cr 15NT202L 2 Cr 15NT203J 4 Cr 15LE204E/ 15LE205E SEMESTER 3 German Language - I / French Language - I / Fourier Series, Partial Quantitative Aptitude & Electronics and Electronics and Fundamentals of Solid State Nanoscale Chemistry Micro/Nanoscale Imaging Japanese Language - I / Differential Equations and Nanoscale Chemistry Logical Reasoning - I Instrumentation Instrumentation Laboratory Engineering Laboratory and Analysis Korean Language - I / their Applications Chinese Language - I

15LE207E/ 15LE208E/ 15LE209E/ 2 Cr 15PD202 1 Cr 15MA209 4 Cr 15ME216 2 Cr 15NT204 3 Cr 15NT205 3 Cr 15NT206 3 Cr 15NT207 3 Cr 15NT207L 2 Cr 15LE210E/ 15LE211E SEMESTER 4 German Language - II / Design, Synthesis and French Language - II/ Thermodynamics and Biological Principles for Design, Synthesis and xi Probability and Random Introduction to Quantum Mechanics for Characterisation of Japanese Language - II/ Verbal Aptitude Statistical Mechanics for Nanoscale Science and Characterisation of Process Manufacturing Engineering Nanotechnologists Nanoscale Materials Korean Language - II/ Nano Systems Engineering Nanoscale Materials Laboratory Chinese Language - II

15NT375L / 15NT380L / 15PD301 1 Cr 15MA206 4 Cr 15NT301 3 Cr 15NT302 3 Cr 15NT303 3 Cr 15NT303L 2 Cr 15NTXXXE 3 Cr 2 Cr 15NT390L 1 Cr 3 Cr 15NT385L/1 5NT490L SEMESTER 5 Minor Project I / Seminar I Nanotoxicology and Communication and Nanobiotechnology / Massive open Online Internship / Industrial Numerical Methods Nanophotonics Nanotechnology Nanobiotechnology Department Elective - I Open Elective I Reasoning Skills Laboratory Courses (MOOCs) Training I Engineering Practice I/Industry Module I

15PD302 1 Cr 15MH311 3Cr 15MH312L 1 Cr 15NT304 3 Cr 15NT304L 1 Cr 15NT305 3 Cr 15NT305L 2 Cr 15NTXXXE 3 Cr 3 Cr

SEMESTER 6

Quantitative Aptitude & Elements of Mechatronics Mechatronics Systems Nanoelectronics Simulation Micro and Nanofabrication Department Elective - Nanoelectronics Micro and Nanofabrication Open Elective II Logical Reasoning - II Systems Laboratory Laboratory Laboratory II,III,IV

15NT376L / 15NT381L / 15NT401M 3 Cr 15NT403 3 Cr 15NT404 3 Cr 15NT404L 2 Cr 15NT405 3 Cr 15NTXXXE 3 Cr 2Cr 15NT391L 1 Cr 15NT386L/15 NT491L SEMESTER 7 Minor Project II / Seminar II Polymer and Polymer and Department Elective - V, / Massive Open Online Internship / Industrial Multi-Disciplinary Design Nanomagnetism Nanocomposites Industrial Nanotechnology Nanocomposites VI Courses(MOOCs) II/Industry Training II Laboratory Module II

15NT496L 12 Cr

SEMESTER 8

Major Project Course 1 Course 2 Course 1 Course 2

Course # 1 is a prerequisite for Course # 2 Course # 1 is a Co Requisite for Course # 2

L T P C 15NT101 Elements of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To enable the students to learn the basics of nanoscience and nanotechnology Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the fundamentals of nanotechnology a 2. Give a general introduction to different classes of nanomaterials a 3. Improve their knowledge on various synthesis methods of nanomaterials e 4. Understand characterization techniques involved in nanotechnology e 5. Familiarize themselves with nanotechnology potentialities d

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Basics and Scale of Nanotechnology 9 1. Introduction and scientific revolutions 1 C 1 1-5 2. Time and length scale in structures 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 3. Definition of a nanosystem 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 4. Dimensionality and size dependent phenomena 1 C 1 1,2,3 5. Surface to volume ratio 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 6. Fraction of surface atoms and surface energy 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 7. Surface stress and surface defects 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 8. Properties at nanoscale – optical & mechanical 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 9. Properties at nanoscale – electronic & magnetic 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 Unit II: Different Classes of Nanomaterials 9 10. Classification based on dimensionality 1 C 2 1,2,3 11. Quantum dots, wells and wires 1 C 2 1,2,3 12. Carbon-based nano materials – fullerences and buckyballs 1 C 2 1,2,3 13. Carbon nanotubes and graphene 1 C 2 1,2,3 14. Metal based nano materials – Nanogold and Nanosilver 1 C 2 1,2,3 15. Metal oxide based nano materials 1 C 2 1,2,3 16. Nanocomposites and nanopolymers 1 C 2 1,2,3 17. Nanoglasses and nano ceramics 1 C 2 1,2,3 18. Biological nanomaterials 1 C 2 1,2,3 Unit III: Synthesis of Nanomaterials 8 19. Chemical methods: Metal nanocrystals by reduction 1 C 3 1,2,3 20. Solvothermal synthesis and photochemical synthesis 1 C 3 1,2,3 21. Sonochemical routes and chemical vapor deposition (CVD) 1 C 3 1,2,3 22. Metal oxide chemical vapor deposition (MOCVD) 1 C 3 1,2,3 23. Physical methods: Ball milling 1 C 3 1,2,3 24. Electrodeposition techniques 1 C 3 1,2,3 25. Spray pyrolysis and flame pyrolysis 1 C 3 1,2,3 26. DC/RF magnetron sputtering, Molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) 1 C 3 1,2,3 Unit IV: Fabrication and Characterization of 8 Nanostructures Nanofabrication: Photolithography and its limitation and 27. 1 C 4 1,2,3 electron beam lithography (EBL) 28. Nanoimprinting and soft lithography patterning 1 C 4 1,2,3 Characterization: Field emission scanning electron 29. microscopy (FESEM) and environmental scanning electron 1 C 4 1,2,3 microscopy (ESEM) 30. High resolution transmission electron microscope (HRTEM) 1 C 4 1,2,3

1 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015 31. Scanning tunneling microscope (STM) 1 C 4 1,2,3 32. Surface enhanced raman spectroscopy (SERS) 1 C 4 1,2,3 33. X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS) 1 C 4 1,2,3 Auger electron spectroscopy (AES), Rutherford backscattering 34. 1 C 4 1,2,3 spectroscopy (RBS) Unit V: Applications in Nanotechonology 8 35. Solar energy conversion and catalysis 1 C 5 1,2,3 36. Molecular electronics, nanoelectronics and printed electronics 1 C 5 1,2,3 37. Polymers with a special architecture, liquid crystalline systems 1 C 5 1,2,3 38. Linear and nonlinear optical and electro-optical properties 1 C 5 1,2,3 39. Applications - nanomaterials for data storage 1 C 5 1,2,3 40. Photonics and plasmonics 1 C 5 1,2,3 41. Chemical and biosensors 1 C 5 1,2,3 Nanomedicine and nanobiotechnology, Nanotoxicology 42. 1 C 5 1,2,3 challenges Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books T. Pradeep, “A Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 1 2012 2 Hari Singh Nalwa, “Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology”, Academic Press, 2008 3 A.Nabok, “Organic and Inorganic Nanostructures”, Artech House, 2009 Reference Books/Other Reading Material C.Dupas, P.Houdy, M.Lahmani, “Nanoscience: Nanotechnologies and Nanophysics”, Springer-Verlag 4 Berlin Heidelberg, 2007 A. S. Edelstein and R. C. Cammarata, “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications”, Institute 5 of Physics Pub., 2001

Course nature Theory Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total In-semester Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage : 50%

2 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT201 Fundamentals of Solid State Engineering 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To teach fundamental scientific concepts essential to solid state engineering so that students are Purpose capable of taking more advanced courses in the field of materials science. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Familiarize with the physics of crystalline solids and elastic properties a 2. Acquire knowledge on lattice dynamics, transport properties and optical a e processes in solids 3. Understand quantum mechanical concepts of free electron and band a theory of solids 4. Gain theoretical knowledge on optical properties, electron-phonon a interactions in solids and in modern hetero structures

Contact Session Description of Topic IOs Reference hours Unit I: Crystal Binding and Elastic Constants 9 1. Introduction to interatomic forces 1 C 1 1,2 2. Van der Waals – London interaction 1 C 1 1 3. Equilibrium lattice constants and cohesive energy 1 C 1,2 1 4. Ionic crystals 1 C 1,2 1,2 5. Madelung energy and Madelung constant 1 C,D 1,2 1 6. Evaluation of the Madelung constant 1 C,D 1,2 1,2 7. Covalent, metallic and hydrogen bonding 1 C 1,2 1 8. Hook’s law: elastic strain components, dilation 1 C 1,2 1 9. Stress components, elastic compliance and stiffness constants 1 C 1,2 1 Unit II: Crystal Diffraction, Vibrations and Thermal 9 Properties 10. Crystal diffraction – Bragg’s law 1 C 1-3 1,2,5 11. Reciprocal lattice vectors, concept of Brillouin zones 1 C 1-3 1,2,5 12. Vibration of crystals with monoatomic basis 1 C 2,3 1,2 13. First Brillouin zone 1 C 2,3 1,2 Group velocity, quantization of elastic waves (concept of 14. 1 C,D 2-4 1,2 phonon) 15. Phonon heat capacity: Planck’s distribution and normal modes 1 C 2-4 1 16. Density of states in one and three dimensions 1 C,D 2-4 1 17. Debye model for density of states - T3 law 1 C 2,3 1,2 18. Einstein model for density of states 1 C 2,3 1,2 Unit III: Free Electron Fermi Gas: Transport Phenomena 8 19. Free electron gas in one dimensions, Fermi- Dirac distribution 1 C 3 1,2,4 20. Effect of temperature on the Fermi – Dirac distribution function 1 C 3 1,2,4 21. Free electron gas in three dimensions: Fermi energy 1 C,D 3 1,2,4 22. Density of states 1 C 2-4 1,4 23. Heat capacity of the electron gas 1 C 2-4 1,4 24. Electrical conductivity and Ohm’s law 1 C 2,3 1,2 25. Electrical resistivity: Matthiessen’s rule 1 C 2,3 1-5 Motion in magnetic fields: cyclotron frequency, Hall effect, 26. 1 C,D 2,3 1-5 thermal conductivity of metals – Wiedemann-Franz law Unit IV: Energy Bands and Semiconductor Crystals 8 27. Nearly free electron model: origin of the energy bands 1 C 2-4 1,2,4 3 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

28. Bloch functions and Kronig-Penney model 1 C 2-4 1,2,4 29. Wave equation of electron in a periodic potential 1 C 2-4 1,2,4 30. Metals and insulators in energy band concept 1 C 2-4 1,2,4 31. Semiconductors: direct and indirect band gap 1 C 2-4 1-5 32. Equations of motions: concept of holes and effective mass 1 C 2-4 1-5 33. Intrinsic carrier concentration and mobility 1 C,D 2-4 1,2,3 Impurity conductivity: donor and acceptor states, semimetals, 34. 1 C,D 2-4 1,2,4 super lattices and Zener tunneling Unit V: Optical Properties of Solids 8 35. Optical reflectance 1 C 1-4 1,2,4 36. Kramers-Kronig relations 1 C 1-4 1,2,4 37. Electronic interband transitions 1 C 1-4 1,2,4 38. Concept of excitons and energy level diagram 1 C 1-4 1,2,4 39. Frenkel excitons: Alkali halides and molecular crystals 1 C 2-4 1,2,4 40. Mott-Wannier excitons 1 C 2-4 1,2,4 41. Raman effect in crystals 1 C 2-4 1,2,4 Concept of plasmons – derivation of plasma frequency, basic 42. 1 C 2-4 1,2,4 concept of polaritons and polarons (qualitative treatment) Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 8th edition, Wiley India, 2015 2. M. Ali Omar, “Elementary Solid State Physics-Principles and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 2005 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. Herald Ibach, Hans Luth, “Solid State Physics-An Introduction to Principles of Materials Science”, Springer Publication, 2009 4. J.M. Ziman, “Principles of Theory of Solids”, Cambridge University Press, 1999 5. A. J. Dekker, “Solid State Physics”, Macmillan India Ltd, 2004

Course nature Theory Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Cycle test Assessment tool Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total In-semester I Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage : 50%

4 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT202 Nanoscale Chemistry 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To acquire basic knowledge in chemistry aspects of nanotechnology Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1 Understand the role of chemistry in nanoparticle synthesis a Improve their ability in understanding the behavior of 2 a e nanomaterials based on its chemistry Acquire knowledge about size effects and reaction kinetics at 3 a e nanoscale 4 Enhance knowledge about the various nanosynthesis techniques a

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Chemical Bonding and Physical Chemistry of Solid 9 Surfaces 1. Introduction to chemical bonding 1 C 1-4 5 2. Atomic bonding, types of bond: metallic, ionic bond 1 C 1 5 3. Covalent and Vander Waals bond 1 C 1 5 4. Surface energy, chemical potential as a function of curvature 1 C,D 1 5 5. Electrostatic stabilization 1 C 1 5 6. Surface charge density 1 C,D 1 5 7. Electric potential at the proximity at solid surface 1 C 1 3,5 8. Vander Waals attraction potential 1 C 1 3,5 9. DLVO theory and steric stabilization 1 C 1 3,5 Unit II: Phase Transition in Nanocrystals 9 10. Crystalline phase transitions in nanocrystals 1 C 2,3 1,5 11. Phase transitions and grain size dependence 1 C 2,3 1,5 12. Elementary thermodynamics of the grain size 1 C 2,3 1,5 13. Dependence of phase transitions 1 C 2,3 1,5 14. Influence of the surface or interface on nanocrystals 1 C 2,3 1,5 15. Modification of transition barriers 1 C 2,3 1,5 16. Geometric evolution of the lattice in nanocrystals-grain size 1 C 2,3 1,5 Dependence, influence of the nanocrystal surface or interface 17. 1 C 2,3 1,5 on the lattice parameter Is there a continuous variation of the crystal state within 18. 1 C 2,3 1,5 nanocrystals? Unit III: Materials Structure and Features of Nanoscale 8 Growth 19. Space lattice and unit cells, crystal system, symmetry operation 1 C 3 6 Structures of common metallic, semiconductor ceramic and 20. 1 C 3 6 superconductor materials 21. Miller indices, representation of directions 1 C,D 3 6 Planes packing fractions, structure determination using X-ray 22. 1 C,D 3 6 diffraction 23. Silicates and clay structures, glass transition temperature 1 C 3 6 24. Non-crystalline materials, imperfections 1 C 3 6 Specific features of nanoscale growth , size control, triggering 25. 1 C 3 1,6 the phase transition Application to solid nanoparticles controlling nucleation , 26. 1 C 3 1,6 controlling growth -controlling aggregation, stability of

5 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

colloidal dispersions - breaking matter into pieces Unit IV: Supercritical Fluid and Cryochemistry of Metal 8 Nanoparticle 27. Supercritical fluids-introduction 1 C,D 3 1 28. Physicochemical properties: solubility, viscosity , diffusion 1 C,D 3 1 29. Thermal conductivity and applications 1 C,D 3,4 1,4 30. Purification and extraction , synthesis 1 C,D 3,4 1,4 31. Cryochemistry of metals- silver and other metals 1 C,D 3,4 1,4 32. Stabilization by polymers 1 C,D 3,4 1,4 33. Stabilization by mesogenes 1 C,D 3,4 1,4 Reactions of rare-earth elements activity, selectivity, and size 34. effects -reactions at super low temperatures reactions of silver 1 C,D 3,4 1,4 particles of various sizes and shapes Unit V: Synthesis of Nanoparticles 8 35. Chemical precipitation method 1 C,D 4 3,4 36. Co-precipitation method 1 C,D 4 3,4 37. Metal nanocrystals by reduction 1 C,D 4 3,4 38. Sol-gel synthesis of nanoparticles 1 C,D 4 3,4 39. Microemulsions or reverse micelles, micelle formation 1 C,D 4 3,4 40. Chemical reduction, emulsions route of synthesis 1 C,D 4 3,4 41. Dendrimers and solvothermal synthesis 1 C,D 4 3,4 Thermolysis routes, microwave heating synthesis- 42. sonochemical synthesis- electrochemical synthesis 1 C,D 4 3,4 photochemical synthesis Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Text Books/Reference Book/Other Reading Material 1 C. Brechignac, P. Houdy, M. Lahmani, “Nanomaterials and Nanochemistry”, Springer publication , 2007 2 Kenneth J. Klabunde, “Nanoscale materials in chemistry”, Wiley Interscience Publications ,2001 3 C. N. Rao, A. Muller, A. K. Cheetham , “Nanomaterials chemistry”, Wiley-VCH ,2007 4 G.B.Sergeev, “Nanochemistry”,Elseiver publication,2006 Guozhong Cao, Ying Wang, “Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties, and 5 Applications”, World Scientific, 2011 6 William D.Callister , “Material Science and Engineering”, John Wiley&Sons, 2007

6 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT202L Nanoscale Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: 15NT202 Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To gain knowledge about the practices and chemical aspects of nanotechnology Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1 Comprehend the fundamentals of wet chemical synthesis a Device protocols for electrochemical estimation of stability and 2 b k corrosion study 3 Synthesize various nanocarriers for specific application k

Contact C-D-I-O Sl. No. Description of experiments IOs Reference hours 1. Synthesis of gold nanoparticles 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3,4 2. Synthesis of photocatalytic solution 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3,4 3. Cryochemical synthesis of metal nanoparticle. 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3,4 4. Synthesis of zinc sulfide quantum dot 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3,4 5. Synthesis of magnetic nanoparticles 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3 6. Synthesis of nanoparticles loaded polymer fibers 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3 7. Synthesis of micelles and inverse micelles 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3 8. Synthesis of silica nanospheres 3 D,I,O 1-3 1,2,3 9. Green synthesis of nanoparticles using plant extract 3 D,I,O 1-3 3-6 10. Fabrication of polymer membrane using phase inversion technique 3 D,I,O 1-3 4,5,6 Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45

Learning Resources Sl. References No. 1. Nanoscale chemistry laboratory course manual, 2016 2. Kenneth J. Klabunde ,“Nanoscale Materials in Chemistry”, Wiley Interscience publications,2001 Vincenzo Turco Liveri “Controlled Synthesis of Nanoparticles in Microheterogeneous 3. Systems”,Springer,2006 4. http://chemistry.beloit.edu/classes/Chem150/index.html 5. http://bioresourcesbioprocessing.springeropen.com/articles/10.1186/s40643-014-0003-y 6. L.H. Sperling, "Introduction to Physical Polymer Science", Wiley Inter science, 2006 Course nature Practical Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment Model Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Total In-semester tool examination Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60% End semester examination Weightage : 40%

7 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT203J Micro/Nanoscale Imaging and Analysis 3 0 2 4 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Microscopy to Nanoscopy explores the world of imaging techniques from micron scale to nanoscale. Purpose Understanding basic concepts and working of these techniques will be helpful to manipulate and create new properties of the materials Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Understand the various imaging techniques related to the field 1. a k of nanotechnology 2. Get familiarized with the science at nanoscale a b Gain in-depth understanding of SPMs and electron 3. a b k microcopies for applications in the field of nanotechnology

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Optical Microscopic Techniques 9 1. Introduction to optical microscopy 1 C 1-3 2 2. Numerical aperture, image resolution, diffraction limit 1 C, D 1-3 2 3. Bright field microscopy- oil immersion microscopy 1 C 1-3 2 4. Kohler illumination - dark field microscope 1 C 1-3 2 5. Differential interference contrast microscopy 1 C 1-3 2 6. Polarizing microscopy - confocal microscopy 1 C 1-3 2 7. Phase contrast microscopy - fluorescence microscopy 1 C 1-3 2 8. Breaking the diffraction limit-I 1 C 1-3 2 9. Breaking the diffraction limit-II 1 C 1-3 2 Unit II - Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 9 Electron optics; imaging with electrons magnetic and 10. 1 C 1-3 1,4 electrostatic lenses, electron sources 11. SEM imaging system 1 C 1-3 1,4 12. Principle of SEM 1 C 1-3 1,4 13. Secondary and backscattered electron images 1 C 1-3 1,4 14. Specimen preparation for SEM, SEM operating conditions 1 C 1-3 1,4 15. Elemental imaging using EDS 1 C 1-3 1,4 16. Field emission SEM 1 C 1-3 1,4 17. Environmental SEM 1 C 1-3 1,4 18. Time resolved microscopy 1 C 1-3 1,4 Unit III - Transmission Electron Microscopy(TEM) 8 19. TEM imaging system; the instruments 1 C 1-3 1,4 20. Specimen preparation for TEM 1 C 1-3 1,4 Kinematics of scattering by nucleus, electron – electron 21. 1 C 1-3 1,4 scattering Scattering contrast for amorphous specimen - diffraction 22. 1 C 1-3 1,4 contrast 23. Diffraction modes - single crystalline and poly-crystalline 1 C 1-3 1,4 Dark field images - phase control, interpretation of high 24. 1 C 1-3 1,4 resolution images 25. Ultrahigh resolution TEM - dynamic TEM 1 C 1-3 1,4 z-contrast imaging, coherent and incoherent imaging, selected 26. 1 C 1-3 1,4 area electron diffraction Unit IV - Scanning Probe Microscopy 8 27. Instrumentation 1 C 1-3 1,3

8 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

28. Surface preparation, tip preparation 1 C 1-3 1,3 29. Cantilever dynamics 1 C,D 1-3 1,3 30. Cantilever fabrication and deflection measurements 1 C 1-3 1,3 31. Contact AFM, non-contact AFM 1 C 1-3 1,3 32. Dynamic contact AFM, taping AFM 1 C 1-3 1,3 33. Force due to electron transition, manipulation of atoms 1 C 1-3 1,3 Scanning thermal microscopy (SThM) and other advanced 34. 1 C 1-3 1,3 SPM Techniques Unit V- Electron Holographic and Tomographic 8 Techniques 35. Image plane of axis holography using the electron biprism 1 C 1-3 1,4 36. Properties of the reconstructed wave 1 C 1-3 1,4 37. Holographic investigations 1 C 1-3 1,4 38. Tomography 1 C 1-3 1,4 39. History and background – electron tomography 1 C 1-3 1,4 40. Missing wedge and imaging modes 1 C 1-3 1,4 41. STEM tomography and applications 1 C 1-3 1,4 42. Hollow cone DF tomography, Diffraction contrast tomography 1 C 1-3 1,4 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Contact Sl. No. Description of Experiments C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Determination of microstructures size using optical 1. 2 I,O 1-3 2,5 microscope Morphological study of nano-structured material using 2. 2 I,O 1-3 1,4,5 scanning electron microscope (SEM). 3. Compositional imaging of nano materials using EDS 2 I,O 1-3 1,4,5 4. Sample preparation for TEM 2 I,O 1-3 1,4.5 5. Selected area electron diffraction (SAED) pattern analysis 2 I,O 1-3 1,4,5 Tunneling measurements using scanning tunneling 6. 2 I,O 1-3 1,3,5 microscope (STM) Study of surface morphology using scanning tunneling 7. 2 I,O 1-3 1,3,5 microscope (STM) Nanoparticle size determination using atomic force 8. 2 I,O 1-3 1,3,5 microcopy (AFM) Surface roughness determination using atomic force 9. 2 I,O 1-3 1,3,5 microscopy (AFM) Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 30

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books, Reference Books/Other Reading Material Gustaaf V. Tendeloo, Dirkan Dyck, Stephen J. Pennycook, “Handbook of Nanoscopy” Wiley publication, 1. 2012 2. Guy Cox, “Optical imaging techniques in cell biology”, CRC press, 2012 3. Bharat Bhusan, “Scanning probe microscopy in Nano-science and Nanotechnology” Springer, 2013 4. Ray, and F. Egerton, “Physical principles of electron microscopy” Springer, 2005 5. Micro/Nanoscale imaging and analysis laboratory course material, 2016

9 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Course nature Theory + Practical Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%) Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total In-semester Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage : 50%

Assessment Method – Practical Component (Weightage 50%) Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total In-semester Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60% End semester examination Weightage : 40%

10 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics for L T P C 15NT204 Nanosystems 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To provide a basic knowledge of the principles and formulations of statistical and thermodynamic Purpose principles for Small systems and to lay emphasis on the fundamentals. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Acquire knowledge in the basic concepts of statistical mechanics 1. a and thermodynamics for nanosystems Apply the principles of thermodynamics and statistical mechanics 2. a e in new formulations Interpret a given problem related to a nano system based on the 3. a e comprehension of the basic principles Emphasize the significance non-equilibrium thermodynamics for 4. a nanosystems Apply of thermodynamic principles in nanosystems of various 5. a dimensions

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours

Unit I: Basic Principles and Laws of Thermodynamics 9 Properties of a system - control volume, surrounding – 1. 1 C 1-2 1 boundaries – universe 2. Types of systems -concept of continuum 1 C 1 1 Thermodynamic equilibrium – state - temperature and zeroth 3. 1 C 1 2 law of thermodynamics Energy transfer by heat and work - first law of 4. 1 C 2 1,3,4,6 thermodynamics Second law of thermodynamics - reversible and irreversible 5. 1 C 2 2 processes 6. Third law of thermodynamics 1 C 2 2 7. Maxwell - Boltzmann distribution 1 C 1 1,3,4,6 Bose-Einstein statistics - the Bose-Einstein gas - Bose- 8. 1 C 2 1 Einstein condensation 9. Fermi-Dirac statistics - the electron gas 1 C 1 1 Unit II: Properties of Pure Substances and Phase 9 Equilibria Pure substance - phases of a pure substance - ideal gas 10. 1 C 2 1,3 equation of a state 11. Property diagrams for phase change processes 1 C 2 1 Deviation from ideal gas behavior – van der Waal’s equation 12. 1 C 2 1 of state Criterion for chemical equilibrium - chemical equilibrium for 13. 1 C 2 1,3 simultaneous reactions 14. Variation of Kp with temperature 1 C 2 1 Phase equilibria and potential phase diagrams-projected and 15. 1 C 2 1 mixed phase diagrams 16. Phase transitions in nanoparticles 1 C 2 1,3 17. Quasi chemical description of solid nanoparticles 1 C 2 1

11 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

18. Size dependent interface energy 1 C 1, 2 1 Unit III: Statistical Mechanics for Nano Systems 8 19. Foundations of statistical mechanics 1 C 1 1 Specification of states of a system - the microstate and the 20. 1 C 2 1 macrostate 21. Contact between statistics and thermodynamics 1 C 1 2,5,7 22. The free energy, classical ideal gas 1 C 3 2,5,7,1 23. Entropy of mixing and Gibb’s paradox 1 C 1 2 24. The semi-classical perfect gas 1 C 1 2 25. Ensembles, microcannonical ensemble 1 C 2 2 The Gibbs Equation for nanosystems - Statistical mechanics 26. 1 C 3 2,5,7 and thermodynamic property predictions Unit IV: Nanothermodynamics 8 Nanothermodynamics –fundamental concepts- 27. thermodynamics and nanothermodynamics -background -the 1 C 3 6-7 nano perspective Comparison with classical equilibrium thermodynamics - 28. 1 C 4 6-7 extensive and intensive properties and state functions Fundamental equations of thermodynamics - equilibrium 29. 1 C 4 6-7 constant and reaction kinetics Hill’s Theory-Tsallis’ generalization of ordinary Boltzmann– 30. 1 C 3 6-7 Gibbs thermostatistics Thermodynamics of metastable phase nucleation on 31. 1 C 4 6-7 nanoscale Classical nucleation thermodynamics-application of Laplace– 32. 1 C 4 6-7 Young equation for the stability of nanophases Thermodynamic descriptions of diamond nucleation in the 33. 1 C 3 6-7 unstable phase regions of the structural state CVD diamond - Cubic boron nitride nucleation in the 34. 1 C 4 6-7 unstable regions of the structural state Unit V: Non-Equilibrium Thermodynamics 8 35. Nonequilibrium thermodynamics 1 C 5 6-7 36. The concept of pseudoequilibrium 1 C 5 6-7 37. Cellular and subcellular systems 1 C 5 6-7 38. Application of classical thermodynamics to nanomaterials 1 C 4 6-7 39. Modern nanothermodynamics 1 C 5 6-7 40. Nonextensivity and nonintensivity 1 C 5 6-7 41. Non-equilibrium nanosystems-basic concepts 1 C 4 6-7 42. Friction in carbon nanotubes- DNA replication 1 C 5 6-7 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material Richard E.Sonntag, Gordon J.VanWylen, ‘‘Introduction to Thermodynamics, Classical and Statistical”, 1. Wiley Publishing, 2010. 2. Claudine Herman, “Statistical Physics’’, Springer, New York, 2005 Yunus .A.Cengel, Michael Boles, “Thermodynamics-An Engineering Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, New 3. Delhi, 2008 Keith Stowe, “An Introduction to Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics’’, Cambridge University, New 4. York, 2007 Günter Radons, Benno Rumpf, and Heinz Georg Schuster, “Nonlinear Dynamics of Nanosystems’’,WILEY- 5. Weinheim,2010

12 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

http://www.nanoscienceworks.org/publications/books/4/9781420048056/ITNS-STUDYGUIDE-Chap8- 45. Nanothermodynamics.pdf C.X. Wang, G.W. Yang, Thermodynamics of metastable phase nucleation at the nanoscale, Materials 46. Science and Engineering, Materials Science and Engineering: R: Reports, 49,157‐202, 2005

13 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT205 Quantum Mechanics for Nanotechnologists 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To provide a working knowledge of the foundations, techniques, and key results of quantum mechanics Purpose for solving problems in nanotechnology. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Explain the origin of old and new Quantum Mechanics a 2. Explain the bound and scattering state and can solve the numerical a e 3. Correlate quantum physics behind applications - Nano Dimension a 4. Solve the many body problems using various assumptions a e 5. Start the core subjects of Nanotechnology based on Quantum Phenomena a

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Basic Formulation & Bound State Problems 9 1. Old quantum mechanics 1 C 1 1,2,3 2. Heisenberg uncertainty principle, Ehrenfest theorem 1 C 1 1,2,3 3. Statistical interpretation and normalization of wave function 1 C 1 1,2,3 4. Hermitian operator, commutation 1 C 1 1,2,3 5. Schrödinger’s time dependent and time independent wave equations 1 C 1 1,2,3 6. Stationary states 1 C 1 1,2,3 7. Infinite square well in one and three dimensions 1 C 1 1,2,3 8. Delta function potential 1 C 1 1,2,3 9. Finite square well 1 C 1 1,2,3 Unit II: Scattering States & Quantum Tunneling 9 10. Scattering states 1 C 2 1,2,3 11. Reflection and transmission of particles 1 C 2 1,2,3 12. Delta function potential well 1 C 2,3 1,2,3 13. Rectangular potential barrier (EV0) 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4 15. Alpha-particle emission 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4 16. Tunneling effect 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4 17. Double delta function potential barriers 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4 18. Resonant tunneling 1 C 2,3 1,2,3,4 Unit III: Discrete Eigenvalue Problems 8 19. Energy Eigen functions and Eigen values coordinates precession. 1 C 3 1,2,3,4 20. Spherical Harmonic oscillator in one dimension 1 C 3 1,2,3,4 21. Momentum, Eigen values 1 C 3 1,2,3,4,5 22. Schrödinger equation in spherical coordinates 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5 23. Angular equation, radial equation 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5 24. Infinite spherical well, ground state properties of hydrogen atom 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5 25. Angular momentum (Lx,Ly,Lz) 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5 26. Generalized angular momentum (Jx,Jy,Jz), Eigen values, Spin 1/2 1 C 3,4 1,2,3,4,5 Unit IV: Approximation Methods 8 27. Principle of variational method 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 28. Proof of variational method and implementation 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 Energy Eigen value in case of time independent perturbation theory 29. 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 for non-degenerate energy levels Eigen function in case of time independent perturbation theory for 30. 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 non-degenerate energy levels 31. Energy Eigen value in case of time independent perturbation theory 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5

14 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

for degenerate energy levels Eigen function in case of time dependent perturbation theory for two- 32. 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 level systems 33. Sinusoidal perturbations 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 Incoherent perturbation, Transition rate , Adiabatic and Sudden 34. 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 approximations (Elementary concepts) Unit V: Identical Particles and Scattering Theory 8 35. Two particle system’s Schrödinger equation 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 36. Transformation to center of mass frame from laboratory frame 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 37. Exchange operator 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 38. Symmetrization of wave function 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 39. Bosons and Fermions 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 40. Exchange forces, solids, free electron gas 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 41. Band structure, quantum scattering theory 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 Differential and total cross sections, Green’s functions , Born 42. 1 C 4,5 1,2,3,4,5 approximation, application to spherically symmetric potentials Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. David J. Griffiths, “Introduction to Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2009 2. Ajoy Ghatak and S. Lokanathan, “Quantum Mechanics”, Fifth Edition, Macmillan, 2009 3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material 4. Bransden B.H., and Joachain C.J., “Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2007 YoavPeleg, Reuven Pnini, Elyahu Zaarur, and Eugene Hecht, “Schaum’s Outline of Quantum Mechanics”, 5. Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010 6. Mathews P.M. and Venkatesan K.,“Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010

15 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Biological Principles for Nanoscale Science and L T P C 15NT206 Engineering 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To learn the fundamental biological principles and concepts essential to nanotechnology so that Purpose students are capable of taking more advanced courses in the field of nanobiotechnology Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Get familiarized with the chemistry of biological molecules a d 2. Gain knowledge on biological membranes and its energetics a Introduce biophysical principles and dynamics involved in biological 3. b systems Acquire knowledge on basic techniques involved in the study of 4. d biological systems, biotechnology and culturing techniques

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introductory Biological Chemistry 9 1. Carbohydrates: classification, configurations and conformations 1 C 1 1,2,3 2. Sugar derivatives, structural and storage polysaccharides 1 C 1 1,2,3 3. Amino acids: general properties, peptide bonds 1 C 1 1,2,3 4. Essential and non-essential amino acids 1 C 1 1,2,3 5. Lipids: classification, properties of lipid aggregates 1 C 1 1,2,3 6. Biological significance of lipids 1 C 1 1,2,3 7. Nucleic acid: chemical structure and base composition 1 C 1 1,2,3 8. Double helical structures, Tm, supercoiled DNA 1 C 1 1,2,3 9. Vitamins, water and fat soluble vitamins, deficiency and diseases 1 C 1 1,2,3 Unit II: Biomembranes and its Energetics 9 10. Biological membranes 1 C 2 1,4 11. Models of membrane structure 1 C 2 1,4 12. Erythrocyte membrane, plant cell membrane, bacterial cell wall 1 C 2 1,4 13. Membrane lipids, proteins and carbohydrates 1 C 2 1,4 14. Membrane proteins 1 C 2 1,4 15. Thermodynamics of transport 1 C 2 1,4 16. Kinetics of transport 1 C 2 1,4 17. Mechanism of transport, active and passive transport 1 C 2 1,4 18. ATP-driven active transport, Ion gradient driven active transport 1 C 2 1,4 Unit III: Biophysics 8 19. Water: structure and interactions, water as solvent, proton mobility 1 C 3 1,5 20. Acid-base reactions, pH and buffers, isoelectric pH 1 C 3 1,5 21. Conformational analysis of proteins 1 C 3 1,5 Polypeptide chain geometrics - forces that determine protein 22. 1 C 3 1,5 structure 23. Dynamics of biomolecules: diffusion, laws of diffusion 1 C 3 1,5 24. Active transport, facilitated diffusion 1 C 3 1,5 25. Osmosis, osmotic pressure, osmoregulation 1 C 3 1,5 Viscosity and biological importance- Surface tension, factors 26. 1 C 3 1,5 influencing surface tension Unit IV: Basic Techniques for the Study of Biological 8 Structure 27. Centrifugation: principles and application 1 C 4 1 28. Sedimentation coefficient, differential, density gradient 1 C 4 1

16 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

29. Ultra-centrifugation 1 C 4 1 30. Chromatography: ion exchange, partition, gel filtration 1 C 4 1 31. Affinity chromatography: principles and applications 1 C 4 1 32. Electrophoresis: principle, isoelectric focusing 1 C 4 1 Types of electrophoresis (polyacrylamide and agarose gel 33. 1 C 4 1 electrophoresis), applications Tracer technique: applications of radioisotopes in biotechnology, 34. 1 C,D 4 1 Autoradiography Unit V: Animal and Plant Biotechnology 8 Plant tissue culture techniques , in vitro pollination and 35. 1 C,D 4 1,6,7 fertilization 36. Introduction to protoplast isolation, culture and regeneration 1 C 4 1,6,7 37. Development of transgenic plants 1 C,D 4 1,6,7 38. Single cell protein (SCP) 1 C 4 1,6,7 39. Basic techniques in animal cell culture and organ culture 1 C,D 4 1,6,7 40. Cell line and isolation of cell line - culture media 1 C,D 4 1,6,7 41. Contaminations and their laboratory management 1 C,D 4 1,6,7 Cell fusion, cell differentiation and growth of cultured cells, 42. 1 C 4 1,6,7 Bioreactors for large scale culture of cells Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. H.K Das, “Text Book of Biotechnology” Wiley India(P) Ltd, 2008 Reference Books/Other Reading Material Nelson, David L. Cox, Michael M. Lehninger, Albert L, “Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry” W H 2. Freeman & Co, 2012 3. Donald Voet, Judith G. Voet, “Biochemistry” Wiley, 2003 4. Geoffrey M.Cooper“The Cell: A molecular approach” ASM Press, 2004 Charles R. Cantor, Paul Reinhard Schimmel “Biophysical Chemistry- Techniques for the Study of Biological 5. Structure and Function”, W. H. Freeman, 1980 Adrian Slater, Nigel W. Scott and Mark R. Fowler “Plant Biotechnology-The genetic manipulation of plants” 6. Oxford university press, 2008 7. P. Ramadass, “Animal biotechnology”, MJP Publishers, 2013

17 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Design, Synthesis and Characterisation of Nanoscale L T P C 15NT207 Materials 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: 15NT202 Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To explore key concepts in nanosynthesis and material characterization and to explore different Purpose strategies for synthesizing low-dimensional nanomaterials (e.g., nanocrystals, nanotubes, nanowires) and common techniques for nanoscale materials characterization. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Gain knowledge of the various process techniques to synthesis 1. a nanostructured materials 2. Understand the factors controlling growth of the nanomaterials e 3. Analyze structural and optical properties of nano structured materials d

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Zero Dimensional Nanostructures (Quantum Dots) and 9 Nanoparticles 1. Introduction to bulk and nanomaterials 1 C 1-3 1,2,3 Nanoparticles through homogeneous nucleation growth, 2. 1 C,D 1 1,2,3 kinetically confined synthesis of nanoparticles Classification of nanoparticle synthesis techniques: solid-state 3. 1 C 1 1,2,3 synthesis of nanoparticles , QD synthesis 4. Mechanical alloying and mechanical milling 1 C,D 1 1,2,3 Vapor-phase synthesis of nanoparticles, inert gas condensation of 5. 1 C 1 1,2,3 nanoparticles 6. Plasma-based , flame-based synthesis of particles 1 C 1 1,2,3 7. Spray pyrolysis based synthesis of nanoparticles 1 C 1 1,2,3 Solution processing of nanoparticles: sol-gel processing, solution 8. 1 C,D 1,2 1,2,3 precipitation Water–oil microemulsion (reverse micelle) method commercial 9. 1 C,D 1,2 1,2,3 production and use of nanoparticles Unit II: One-Dimensional Nanostructures: Nanowires and 9 Nanorods 10. 1 Dimensional nanostructures: introduction 1 C 2 1,2 Spontaneous growth - evaporation (dissolution) condensation 11. 1 C 2 1,2 growth 12. Fundamentals of evaporation (dissolution) condensation growth 1 C 2 1,2 13. Evaporation-condensation growth mechanism 1 C,D 2 1,2 Dissolution-condensation growth, fundamental aspects of (vapour- 14. 1 C,D 2 1,2 liquid-solid)VLS and (solid-liquid-solid) SLS growth 15. VLS growth of nanowires and nanocrystals 1 C,D 2 1,2 16. Control of the size of the nanowires 1 C,D 2 1,2 17. Precursors and catalysts – SLS growth 1 C,D 2 1,2 18. Stress induced recrystalization. template based synthesis 1 C,D 2 1,2 Unit III: Two-Dimensional Nanostructures: Thin Films and 8 Special Nanomaterials 19. Fundamentals of film growth 1 C 2,3 1,2,3 20. Physical vapor deposition (PVD) 1 C 2,3 1,2,3 21. Chemcialvapour deposition (CVD) 1 C 2,3 1,2,3 22. Atomic layer deposition (ALD) , self-assembly 1 C,D 2,3 1,2,3 23. LB technique - electrochemical deposition 1 C 2,3 1,2,3

18 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

24. Sol-Gel Films; spin coating and dip coating 1 C,D 2,3 1,2,3 25. Electrochemcial deposition and electrophoretic deposition 1 C 2,3 2,3 Micro and mesoporous material and core shell structure- 26. 1 C,D 2,3 2,3 Nanocomposites and nanograined materials Unit IV: - Green and Biological Methods of Synthesis 8 27. Introduction to biological methods of synthesizing nanomaterials 1 C 1,2 1,6 28. Use of bacteria, fungi(nanoparticle synthesis) 1 C 1,2 1,6 29. Actinomycetes for nanoparticle synthesis 1 C 1,2 1,6 Magnetotactic bacteria for natural synthesis of magnetic 30. 1 C 1,2 6 nanoparticles 31. Mechanism of formation 1 C 1,2 6 32. Viruses as components (for synthesis) 1 C 1,2 6 33. Formation of nanostructured materials using viruses 1 C 1,2 6 Synthesis process and application, Green synthesis of 34. 1 C,D 1,2 6 nanoparticles using plant extracts Unit V: Characterization Techniques 8 35. X-ray methods: introduction 1 C 3 2,4 36. Production of X-rays & X-ray spectra, instrument units 1 C 3 2,4 37. X-ray detectors, X-ray fluorescence method 1 C 3 2,4 38. Energy dispersive analysis of X-rays 1 C,D 3 2,4 39. Infrared (IR) spectroscopy and applications 1 C,D 3 2,4,5 40. UV –Vis spectroscopy: principle and applications 1 C,D 3 2,4,5 Principle and instrumentation of thermogravimetry, differential 41. 1 C,D 3 2,4 thermal analysis Differential scanning calorimetry – principle importance of thermal 42. 1 C,D 3 2,4 analysis for nanostructures Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Textbooks/Reference Books/Other Reading Material Guozhong Cao, “Nanostructures and Nanomaterials, synthesis, properties and applications”, Imperial 1 College Press, 2004 C. N. Rao, A. Muller, A. K. Cheetham “The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and 2 Applications”, Wiley, 2004 Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannangara and Geoff Smith “NANOTECHNOLOGY - Basic Science and 3 Emerging Technologies”, A CRC Press Company, D.C, 2002 Douglas A. Skoog, James Holler, “Principles of Instrumental analysis”,Sauders college publication, CBS 4 publishers and distributors1998 Valeri P. Tolstoy, “Hand book of Infrared spectroscopy of ultra thinfilms”,John Wiley& Sons publication, 5 2003 6 C.A. Mirkin and C.M. Niemeyer, “Nanobiotechnology- II, More Concepts and Applications”, WILEY- VCH, VerlagGmbH&Co, 2007

19 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Design, Synthesis and Characterization of L T P C 15NT207L Nanoscale Materials Laboratory 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: 15NT207 Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To instruct the fundamental principles of Synthesis and Characterization Techniques Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Understand the various process techniques available of nanostructure 1. a d materials Enhance the various analytical technique to understand the nano 2. e k properties and characteristics of nanomaterials

Contact Sl. No. Description of experiments C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Synthesis of iron oxide nanoparticle by gel combustion 1. technique and to determine the crystallite size using X- Ray 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 diffraction Techniques Thin film preparation by spin coating technique and to find 2. 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 dislocation density and strain of given sample by XRD methods Synthesis of nickel metal nanoparticle by hydrothermal 3. technique and to determine particle size using UV-Vis 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 spectrometer. Synthesis of zinc oxide semiconducting nanoparticle by co 4. precipitation technique and to calculate the absorption 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 coefficient & optical bandgap using UV-Vis spectrometer. Synthesis of aqueous ferrofluid by wet chemical methods and 5. peak analysis of IR Transmission spectrum using FTIR 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 spectroscopy 6. Element identification by using XRF analysis 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 Preparation of nanoparticles by using ball milling and determine 7. 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 the particle size using X- Ray diffraction Techniques Preparation of nanoparticles using sonochemical reactor and 8. determine the dislocation density and Strain of given sample by 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 XRD methods Dip coating and to calculate the absorption coefficient & optical 9. 3 D,I,O 1-2 1-3 bandgap using UV-Vis spectrometer Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45

Learning Resources Sl. References No. 1 Design, synthesis and characterization of nanomaterials laboratory course manual, 2016 A S Edelstein and R C Cammarata, “Nanomaterials: synthesis, Properties and Applications”, Taylor and 2 Francis, 2012 Douglas A. Skoog, F. James Holler, “Principles of Instrumental analysis”,Sauders college publication, 3 CBS publishers, 1998

Course nature Practical Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total In-semester Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60% End semester examination Weightage : 40%

20 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT301 Nanophotonics 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose The objective is to make the learners understand the concepts of Nanophotonics. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the fundamentals of light interaction at nanoscale a e 2. Learn the basic concepts of quantum confined materials a e 3. Improve their knowledge of plasmonics and near field optics a e 4. Familiarize themselves with nanophotonic fabrication a e 5. Und erstand the various aspects of biophotonics a e

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I - Basics for Nanophotonics 9 1. Photons and electrons, similarities and differences 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 2. Free space propagation - Confinement of photons and electrons 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 3. Propagation through a classically forbidden zone 1 C 1 1,2,3 4. Tunneling Localization under a periodic potential 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 5. Band gap and cooperative effects for photons and electrons 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 Nanoscale optical interactions, axial and lateral nanoscopic 6. 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 localization 7. Nanoscale confinement of electronic interactions 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 8. Quantum confinement effects and nanoscale interaction dynamics 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 9. Nanoscale electronic energy transfer and Cooperative emissions 1 C 1 1-5 Unit II - Quantum Confined Materials and Photonic Crystals 9 Quantum confined materials: Inorganic quantum confined 10. 1 C 2 1,2,3 structures Manifestation of quantum confinement and quantum confined 11. 1 C 2 1,2,3 stark effect 12. Dielectric confinement effect and super lattices 1 C 2 1,2,3 13. Core-shell quantum dots and quantum wells 1 C 2 1,2,3 Quantum confined structures as lasing media and organic quantum 14. 1 C 2 1,2,3 confined structures. 15. Photonic crystals: Important features of photonic crystals 1 C 2 1,2,3 16. Dielectric mirrors and interference filters 1 C 2 1,2,3 17. Photonic crystal laser and photonic crystal fibers (PCFs) 1 C 2 1,2,3 18. Photonic crystal sensing 1 C 2 1,2,3 Unit III - Plasmonics and Near Field Optics 8 19. Plasmonics: Internal reflection and evanescent waves 1 C 3 1,2,3 Plasmons and surface plasmon resonance, attenuated total 20. 1 C 3 1,2,3 reflection 21. Grating SPR coupling and optical waveguide SPR coupling 1 C 3 1,2,3 22. SPR dependencies and materials, plasmonics and nanoparticles 1 C 3 1,2,3 23. Near Field Optics: Aperture less near field optics 1 C 3 1,2,3 24. Near field scanning optical microscopy (NSOM or SNOM) 1 C 3 1,2,3 25. SNOM based detection of plasmonic energy transport 1 C 3 1,2,3 SNOM based visualization of waveguide structures, SNOM based 26. 1 C 3 1,2,3 optical data storage and recovery Unit IV - Nanophotonic Fabrication 8 27. Adiabatic nanofabrication 1 C,D 4 1,2,3 28. Non adiabatic nanofabrications: near field optical CVD 1 C,D 4 1,2,3

21 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

29. Near field photolithography 1 C,D 4 1,2,3 30. Self-assembling method via optical near field interactions 1 C,D 4 1,2,3 Regulating the size of nanoparticles using size dependent 31. 1 C,D 4 1,2,3 resonance Regulating the position of nanoparticles using size dependent 32. 1 C,D 4 1,2,3 resonance 33. Size controlled alignment of nanoparticles 1 C,D 4 1,2,3 Position controlled alignment of nanoparticles, Separation 34. 1 C,D 4 1,2,3 controlled alignment of nanoparticles Unit V – Nanobiophotonics 8 35. The cell, scale and constituents 1 C 5 1-5 36. Origin and optical contrast mechanisms 1 C 5 1-5 37. Classical contrast mechanisms: bright field and dark field contrast 1 C 5 1-5 38. Phase contrast and inter ferrometric contrast 1 C 5 1-5 39. Fluorescence contrast mechanism 1 C 5 1-5 Nonlinear microscopy based on second harmonic generation and 40. 1 C 5 1-5 coherent antistokes 41. Raman scattering 1 C 5 1-5 Reduction of the observation volume – far field methods, 4Pi 42. microscopy, microscopy on a mirror and stimulated emission 1 C 5 1-5 depletion Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books M.Ohtsu,K.Kobayashi,T.Kawazoe and T.Yatsui, “Principals of Nanophotonics (Optics and 1. Optoelectronics)”,CRC press,2003 2. H.Masuhara,S Kawata and F Tokunga, “NanoBiophotoics”, Elsevier Science, 2007 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. BEA Saleh and AC Teich, “Fundamentals of Photonics”, John Wiley and Sons,1993 4. P.N.Prasad, “Introduction to Biophotonics”, John Wiley and Sons, 2003 Zhao, Yong Sheng (Ed.), “Organic Nanophotonics - Fundamentals and Applications”, Springer-Verlag Berlin 5. Heidelberg, 2015

22 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT302 Nanotoxicology and Nanotechnology Engineering Practice 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The purpose of this course is to evaluate nanomaterial safety for various applications, its impact on Purpose environment and also to determine the real or perceived risks of using nanomaterials. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Acquire and create awareness on the toxicity of nanomaterials c 2. Understand the protocols involved in testing toxicity of nanomaterials f 3. Discuss the adverse effect of nanoparticles in biological systems a Produce nanomaterials and products without harming the environment 4. h or human health

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Toxicity of Nanomaterials 9 1. Introduction to toxicology 1 C 1 1,2 2. Size-specific behavior of nanomaterials 1 C 1,2 1,2 3. Nanotoxicology challenges 1 C 1,2 1,2 4. Carbon nanotubes in practice 1 C 1,2 1,2 5. Postproduction processing of carbon nanotubes 1 C 1,2 1,2 6. Physicochemical properties of nanomaterials 1 C 1,2 1,2 Mediators of toxicity-physicochemical properties of 7. 1 C 1,2 1,2 nanomaterials Characterization of administered nanomaterials during 8. 1 C 1,2,3 1,2 toxicity studies Nanomaterial characterization after administration 9. 1 C 1,2 1,2 experiment Unit II: Nanoparticle Exposure 9 10. Physicochemical determinants in particle toxicology 1 C 2,3 1,2 11. Nanoparticles vs. micron-size particles 1 C 2,3 1,2 12. Nanoparticle toxicity comparison to larger counterparts 1 C 1,2,3 1,2 13. Requirement for appropriate model particles, 1 C 1,2,3 1,2 Exposure assessment, exposure pathways and their 14. 1 C 2,3 1,2 significance 15. Documenting the occurrence and nature of exposures 1 C 2,3 1,2 16. Bio-distribution of nanoparticles 1 C 2,3 1,2 17. Localization of particles in tissues 1 C 2,3 1,2 18. Relevance of drug targeting to nanotoxicology 1 C 2,3 1,2 Unit III: Nanoparticle Interaction with Biological 8 Membranes 19. Interaction of nanoparticles with lipid bilayers 1 C 2,3 2,3,4 Cell-level studies of nanoparticle-induced membrane 20. 1 C 2,3 2,3,4 permeability 21. Internalization of cation nanoparticles into cells 1 C 2,3 2,3,4 Placental biological barrier model for evaluation of 22. 1 C 2,3 2,3,4 nanoparticle transfer Transport across placental barrier, Assessment of placental 23. 1 C 2,3 2,3,4 transfer 24. Biological mechanism of nanoparticle disposition 1 C 2,3 2,3,4 25. Outline of gene-cellular interactions of nanomaterials 1 C 2,3 2,3,4

23 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Overview of dermal effects of nanomaterials, Toxicity of 26. 1 C 2,3 2,3,4 nanoparticles in the eye Unit IV: Advanced Methodologies and Techniques for 8 Assessing Nanomaterial Toxicity 27. High-content screening in nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2 28. Enabling product translation- Nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2 In-vitro high content screening assessment of nanomedicinal 29. 1 C 4 1,2 products 30. Ex-vivo assessment of nanomedicinal products 1 C 4 1,2 31. Histopathology assessment of nanomedicinal products 1 C 4 1,2 32. Impendance high throughput screening in nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2 33. Atomic force microscopy in nanomedicine 1 C 4 1,2 Nanomedicine methodology for translation, Advantages and 34. 1 C 4 1,2 limitations- Nanomedicine Unit V: Guidelines for Working with Engineered 8 Nanomaterials Guidelines for working with engineered nanomaterials- 35. 1 C 1,2,3 5,6 Introduction 36. Potential for Occupational Exposure 1 C 1,2,3 5,6 37. Factors Affecting Exposure to Nanomaterials 1 C 2,3 5,6 38. Elements of a Risk Management Program 1 C 2,3 5,6 39. Engineering controls 1 C 3,4 5,6 40. Dust collection efficiency of filters 1 C 3,4 5,6 41. Work practices 1 C 3,4 5,6 Personal protective clothing, respirators, Cleanup and 42. 1 C 2,3,4 5,6 disposal of nanomaterials Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. A. Monterio-Rivierie, C. Lang Tran, “Nanotoxicology”, Informa health care, London, 2007 A. Monterio-Rivierie, C. Lang Tran, “Nanotoxicology, Characterization, Dosing and Health effects”, 2. Informa health care, London, 2007 Reference Books/Other Reading Material Yuliang Zhao, Hari Singh Nalwa, “Nanotoxicology: interactions of nanomaterials with biological 3. systems”, American Scientific Publishers, 2007 Louis Theodore “Nanotechnology Basic Calculations for Engineers and Scientists”, John Wiley and 4. Sons, 2006 Lynn Goldman, Christine Coussens, “Implications of nanotechnology for environmental health research”, 5. National Academic Press, Washington, 2007 “Approaches to safe nanotechnology: Managing the health and safety concerns associated with 6. engineered nanomaterials”, DHHS (NIOSH) publishers, 2009

24 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT303 Nanobiotechnology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: 15NT206 Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of nanotechnology in biological Purpose and biomedical research. It will also guide the students to understand how nanomaterials can be used for a diversity of analytical and medicinal rationales. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Understand the essential features of biology and nanotechnology 1. a h that are converging to create the new area of bionanotechnology Recognize the structural and functional principles of 2. c bionanotechnology 3. Employ bionanomaterials for analysis and sensing techniques c Apprehend and explain the biomedical applications of 4. d nanotechnology

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Nanobiomaterials 9 1. Introduction to nanobiomaterials 1 C 1 1,3 2. Surface and bulk properties of bio materials 1 C 1 1,3 3. Nanobiomaterials, nanoceramics 1 C 1 1,3 4. Nanopolymers, nano silica 1 C 1 1,3 Hydroxy apatite, carbon based nanomaterials, surface 5. 1 C 1 1,3 modification 6. Textured and porous materials 1 C 1 1,3 7. Surface immobilized biomolecules 1 C 1 1,3 8. Cell-biomaterial interactions, immune response 1 C 1 1,3 9. In vitro and in vivo assessment of tissue compatibility 1 C 1 1,3 Unit II - Structural & Functional Principles of 9 BionanotechnologY 10. Lipid bilayers, liposomes 1 C 1,2 1,2 11. Neosomes, polysaccharides 1 C 1,2 1,2 12. Peptides, nucleic acids 1 C 1,2 1,2 13. DNA scaffolds, enzymes 1 C 1,2 1,2 14. Biomolecular motors: linear, rotary mortors 1 C 1,2 1,2 15. Immunotoxins, membrane transporters and pumps 1 C 1,2 1,2 16. Antibodies- monoclonal antibodies 1 C 1,2 1,2 17. Immunoconjugates 1 C 1,2 1,2 18. Limitations of natural biomolecules 1 C 1,2 1,2 Unit III – Protein and DNA Based Nanostructures 8 Nanocircuitry - S-layer proteins: structure, chemistry and 19. 1 C 1,2 1 assembly 20. lipid chips -S - Layers as Templates 1 C 1,2 1 21. Engineered nanopores 1 C 1,2 1 22. DNA–protein nanostructures 1 C 1,2 1 23. DNA-templated electronics 1 C 1,2 1 24. DNA-based metallic nanowires and networks 1 C 2,3 1 25. DNA- gold-nanoparticle conjugates 1 C 2,3 1 DNA - templated electronics, DNA nanostructures for 26. 1 C 2,3 1 mechanics and computing

25 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Unit IV- Nanobio-Analytics 8 27. Nanobio-analytics-introduction 1 C 3,4 1 28. Luminescent quantum dots for biological labeling 1 C 3,4 1 29. Nanoparticle molecular labels 1 C 3,4 1 Surface biology: analysis of biomolecular structure by 30. 1 C 3,4 1 atomic force microscopy Analysis of biomolecular structure by molecular pulling - 31. 1 C 3,4 1 force spectroscopy 32. Biofunctionalized nanoparticles for surface 1 C 3,4 1 33. Enhanced Raman scattering, Surface plasmon resonance 1 C 3,4 1 Bioconjugated silica nanoparticles for bioanalytical 34. 1 C 3,4 1 applications Unit V-Nanotechnology in Food, Medicine and Health 8 Science 35. Nano particle based drug delivery systems 1 C, I 2,3,4 4,1 36. Ultra sound triggered nano/microbubbles 1 C 2,3,4 4,1 37. Regenerative medicine, nanoimmuno conjugates 1 C 2,3,4 4,1 Biosensors - optical biosensors based on nanoplasmonics, 38. 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1 nanobiosesors Nano-biosensors for mimicking gustatory and olfactory 39. 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1 senses 40. Cyclodextrin in nanomedicinal foods and cosmetics 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1 Bioavailability and delivery of nutraceuticals and 41. 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1 functional foods using nanotechnology Polymer-based nanocomposites for food 42. packaging, nanocomposites for food packaging, Toxicity 1 C,I 2,3,4 4,1 and environmental risks of nanomaterials Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. C. M. Niemeyer, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”, Wiley – VCH, 2006 2. David S Goodsell, “Bionanotechnology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004 Reference Books/Other Reading Material Buddy D. Ratner , Allan S. Hoffman , Frederick J. Schoen, Jack E. Lemons, “ Biomaterials Science: An 3. Introduction to Materials in Medicine”, Academic Press, 2012 Debasis Bagchi, Manashi Bagchi, Hiroyoshi Moriyama, Fereidoon Shahidi, “Bio-Nanotechnology: A 4. Revolution in Food, Biomedical and Health Sciences” Wiley-Blackwell, 2013

26 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT303L Nanobiotechnology Laboratory 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: 15NT303 Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of nanotechnology in biological Purpose and biomedical research. It will also guide the students to understand how nanomaterials can be used for a diversity of analytical and medicinal rationales. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Employ bionanomaterials for analysis and sensing techniques c k 2. Apprehend and explain the biomedical applications of nanotechnology d

Sl. Contact Description of experiments C-D-I-O IOs Reference No. hours 1. Isolation and bioconjugation DNA structure with nanoparticles 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 2. Determination of electrical conduction of DNA-nano conjugate 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 3. Detection of biomolecule by cyclic voltammetry 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 4. Estimation of analyte concentration using electrochemical sensor 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 5. Functionalization of nanoparticles for drug delivery 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 6. 2D- Electrophoresis technique for separation of proteins 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 7. Effect of nanoparticles on biomolecules 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 8. Synthesis polymeric scaffold by particulate leaching 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 9. Quantitative estimation of biomolecule- conjugated quantum dots 3 I,O 1,2 1-3 Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45

Learning Resources Sl. References No. 1. Nanobiotechnology Laboratory course material, 2016 Andrew Collins, “Nanotechnology Cookbook: Practical, Reliable and Jargon-free Experimental 2. Procedures”, Elsevier, 2012 Challa, “Nanofabrication Towards Biomedical Applications, Techniques, Tools, Applications and Impact”, 3. Wiley – VCH, 2005

27 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT375L Minor Project I 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: Prerequisite: Data Book / Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To obtain an hands-on experience in converting a small novel idea / technique into a working Purpose model / prototype involving multi-disciplinary skills and / or knowledge and working in at team. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able 1. To conceptualise a novel idea / technique into a product c 2. To think in terms of multi-disciplinary environment d To understand the management techniques of implementing a 3. k project To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a presentation in a 4. g professional manner, and document all aspects of design work.

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours An Multidisciplinary project to be taken up by a team of maximum of ten students. Development of prototype product, a 3D model, simulation, blueprint for a larger project and any other development work are permitted. The contribution of the individuals in the project C,D,I 1,2,3,4 should be clearly brought out. A combined report is to be submitted. A presentation is to be made for the reviewers on the work done by the candidate. Total contact hours

Project – 100% internal continuous Course nature assessment Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Refer the table Total In-semester Weightage Refer the table below 100% End semester examination Weightage : 0%

28 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Assessment components

Assessment Criteria or Expected outcome Evaluators Marks component basis A short presentation to be delivered on:  A brief, descriptive project title (2-4 words). This is critical!  The 3 nearest competitors (existing solutions) and Viability / price. feasibility of Project  Team members name, phone number, email, Panel of the project proposal department/degree program, and year. 0 reviewers Extent of (Review – I)  A description of the product opportunity that has preliminary been identified. To include: Documentation of the work done. market need, shortcomings of existing competitive products, and definition of the target market and its size.  Proposed supervisor / guide Originality, Multi- disciplinary  Mission Statement / Techniques component,  Concept Sketches, Design Specifications / Modules Panel of clarity of Review II 20 & Techniques along with System architecture reviewers idea and  Coding presentation, team work, handling Q&A. Originality, Multi-  Final Concept and Model / Algorithm/ Technique disciplinary component,  Drawings, Plans / programme output Panel of clarity of Review III  Financial Model / costing 50 reviewers idea and  Prototype / Coding presentation,  Final Presentation and Demonstration team work, handling Q&A. Regularity, systematic Final progress, Supervisor / technical A good technical report extent of 30 Guide Report work and quality of work Total 100

29 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT380L Seminar I 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To enhance the disseminating skills of the student about the current and contemporary research Purpose work that are being carried out across the world. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able To understand the research methodology adopted by various 1. h i j researchers To mathematically model a problem, critically analyse it and 2. b c e adopt strategies to solve 3. To understand and present a well documented research e g

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Guidelines for conducting 15NT380L Seminar for B.Tech 1. Upon registering for the course the student must identify a sub- domain of the degree specialization that is of interest to the student and start collecting research papers as many as possible. 2. After collecting sufficient number of research papers the student must peruse all the papers, meet the course faculty and discuss on the salient aspects of each and every paper. 3. The course faculty, after discussion with the student will approve TWO research papers that is appropriate for presentation. 4. The student must collect additional relevant reference materials to supplement and compliment the two research papers and start preparing the presentation. 5. Each student must present a 15-minute presentation on each of the approved research paper to the panel of evaluators. 6. The presenter must present one research paper within the first C,D 1,2,3,4 half of the semester (6 weeks) and another research paper in the next half of the semester (6 weeks) as per the schedule. 7. All other students registered for the course will form the audience. 8. The audience as well as the evaluators will probe the student with appropriate questions and solicit response from the presenter. 9. The presentation will be evaluated against 7 to 8 assessment criteria by 4 to 5 evaluators. 10. The score obtained through the presentations of TWO research papers will be converted to appropriate percentage of marks.

This course is 100% internal continuous assessment.

Total contact hours

100% internal continuous Course nature assessment. Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Presentation 1 Presentation 2 Total In-semester Weightage 50% 50% 100% End semester examination Weightage : 0%

30 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Department of Physics and Nanotechnology EVALUATION OF SEMINAR PRESENTATIONS

Name of the Student: Date: Register Number: Degree and Branch: Topic: Sl. No. Criteria for Assessment Evaluator 1 Evaluator 2 Evaluator 3 Evaluator 4 Evaluator 5 1 Understanding of the subject 2 Clarity of presentation Appropriate use of Audio visual 3 aids Whether cross references have 4 been consulted Ability to respond to questions on 5 the subject 6 Time scheduling 7 Completeness of preparation

Poor 1 Below Average 2 Average 3 Good 4 Very Good 5

Overall Grades: Remarks: Signature of Course Coordinator

31 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT385L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) I 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To offer students the opportunity to study with the world’s best universities by integrating select MOOCs in a regular degree programme and providing students full credit transfer, as per Purpose university regulations, if they earn a “Verified / Completion Certificate” and take a proctored examination through a secure, physical testing center. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able To apply the concepts, theories, laws, technologies learnt herein 1. to provide engineering solutions. f h i j

Online - 100% internal continuous Course nature assessment. Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Non-proctored / Proctored / Assessment tool Quiz Assignment Total In-semester Unsupervised Tests Supervised Test Weightage 25% 25% 10% 40% 100% End semester examination Weightage : 0%

Registration process, Assessment and Credit Transfer:

1. Students can register for courses offered by approved global MOOCs platforms like edX, Coursera or Universities with which SRM partners specifically for MOOCs. 2. Annually, each department must officially announce, to the students as well as to the Controller of Examinations, the list of courses that will be recognised and accepted for credit transfer. 3. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more faculty coordinator(s) for advising the students attached to them, monitoring their progress and assist the department in proctoring the tests, uploading the marks / grades, and collecting and submitting the graded certificate(s) to the CoE, within the stipulated timeframe. 4. Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above department-approved list, through MOOCs must register for that course during the course registration process of the Faculty of Engineering and Technology, SRM University. 5. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will include the MOOCs course registered. 6. The student must periodically submit the marks / grades obtained in various quizzes, assignments, tests etc immediately to the Faculty Advisor or the Course Coordinator for uploading in the university’s academic module. 7. The student must take the final test as a Proctored / Supervised test in the university campus. 8. The student must submit the “Certificate of Completion” as well as the final overall Marks and / or Grade within the stipulated time for effecting the grade conversion and credit transfer, as per the regulations. It is solely the responsibility of the individual student to fulfill the above conditions to earn the credits. 9. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding attendance grade, will be considered 100% , if the credits are transferred, after satisfying the above (1) to (7) norms; else if the credits are not transferred or transferable, the attendance will be considered as ZERO.

32 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT390L Internship / Industrial Training I 0 0 2 1 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval --- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To provide short-term work experience in an Industry/ Company/ Organisation Purpose Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able 1. To get an inside view of an industry and organization/company j 2. To gain valuable skills and knowledge j 3. To make professional connections and enhance networking f g To get experience in a field to allow the student to make a 4. i career transition

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours 1. It is mandatory for every student to undergo this course. 2. Every student is expected to spend a minimum of 15-days in an Industry/ Company/ Organization, during the summer vacation. 3. The type of industry must be NOT below the Medium Scale category in his / her domain of the degree programme. 4. The student must submit the “Training Completion Certificate” issued by the industry / company / Organisation as well as a technical report not exceeding 15 pages, within the stipulated time to be eligible for making a presentation before the committee constituted by the department. 5. The committee will then assess the student based on the report submitted and the presentation made. 6. Marks will be awarded out of maximum 100. 7. Appropriate grades will be assigned as per the regulations. 8. Only if a student gets a minimum of pass grade, appropriate D, I,O 1,2,3,4 credit will be transferred towards the degree requirements, as per the regulations. 9. It is solely the responsibility of the individual student to fulfill the above conditions to earn the credits. 10. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding attendance grade, will be considered 100%, if the credits are transferred, after satisfying the above (1) to (8) norms; else if the credits are not transferred or transferable, the attendance will be considered as ZERO. 11. The committee must recommend redoing the course, if it collectively concludes, based on the assessment made from the report and presentations submitted by the student, that either the level of training received or the skill and / or knowledge gained is NOT satisfactory. Total contact hours

Training – 100% internal continuous Course nature assessment Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Presentation Report Total In-semester Weightage 80% 20% 100% End semester examination Weightage : 0%

33 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT490L Industry Module I 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To impart an insight into the current industrial trends and practices Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able 1. To obtain an insight into the current industrial trends and practices j 2. To obtain an insight into the technologies adopted by industries j To obtain an insight into the technical problems encountered by the 3. h industries and the scope for providing solutions. 4. To network with industry g

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours 1. The department will identify and shortlist few emerging topics that are trending in industry. 2. The department will identify experts from industry who are willing to deliver modules on the shortlisted topics. 3. The identified expert will assist the department in formulating the course content to be delivered as a 30-hour module, prepare lectures notes, ppt, handouts and other learning materials. 4. The department will arrange to get the necessary approvals for offering the course, from the university’s statutory academic bodies well before the actual offering. 5. The department must officially announce, to the students as well as to the Controller of Examinations, the list of courses that will be offered as industry module. 6. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more faculty coordinator(s) for advising the students attached to them, C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4 monitoring their progress and assist the department in proctoring/supervising/assessment the quizzes, assignments, tests etc, uploading the marks, attendance etc, within the stipulated timeframe. 7. The Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above department-approved list, must register for that course during the course registration process of the Faculty of Engineering and Technology, SRM University. 8. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will include the Industry Module also. 9. All academic requirements of a professional course like minimum attendance, assessment methods, discipline etc will be applicable for this Industry Module. 10. The course will be conducted on week ends or beyond the college regular working hours. Total contact hours 30

100% internal continuous Course nature assessment. Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%) Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total In-semester Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage 50%

34 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT304 Nanoelectronics 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: 15NT201 Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanoelectronics Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The major goals and objectives are to provide the fundamental principles of nanoelectronics with the Purpose present research front in applications and to be able to critically assess future trends. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Understand the limitations of silicon electronics and progress of 1. a e nanoelectronics Equip themselves about the significance of tunneling effect in 2. a e nanoelectronic devices Understand the concepts of coulomb blockade and electron 3. a e transport Improve their ability in knowing the electronic property of 4. a e materials in mesoscopic level 5. Achieve adequate knowledge in simulation methods a e

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Evolution of Nanoelectronics 9 1. Introduction to nanoelectronics 1 C 1 1-5 2. Moore’s law and its consequences 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 3. Silicon electronics - limitations 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 Discussion of the international technology roadmap 4. 1 C 1 1,2,3 characteristics 5. Need for new concepts in electronics 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 6. Silicon MOS transistor from micro to nano 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 7. Challenges in micro to nano conversion 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 8. Nanocomputing 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 9. Future opportunities and applications 1 C 1 1,2,3,4 Unit II: Tunnel Junctions and Applications of Tunneling 9 10. Tunneling through a potential barrier 1 C,D 2 1,2,3 11. Potential energy profiles for material interfaces 1 C 2 1,2,3 12. Metal - insulator and metal - semiconductor junctions 1 C 2 1,2,3 13. Metal - insulator - metal junctions 1 C 2 1,2,3 14. Applications of tunneling 1 C 2 1,2,3 15. Field emission gate - oxide tunneling 1 C 2 1,2,3 16. Hot electron effects in MOSFETs 1 C 2 1,2,3 17. Double barrier tunneling 1 C 2 1,2,3 18. Resonant tunneling diode 1 C 2 1,2,3 Unit III: Ballistic and Spin Transport 8 19. Coulomb blockade 1 C 3 1,2,3 20. Tunnel junction excited by a current source 1 C 3 1,2,3 21. Coulomb blockade in a quantum dot circuit 1 C 3 1,2,3 22. Single electron transistor, ballistic transport 1 C 3 1,2,3 23. Electron collisions and length scales 1 C 3 1,2,3 24. Ballistic transport model 1 C 3 1,2,3 25. Quantum resistance and conductance 1 C 3 1,2,3 26. Transport of spin , spintronics devices and applications 1 C 3 1,2,3 Unit IV: Molecular Electronics 8 27. Introduction to moletronics 1 C 4 1,2,3

35 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

28. An atomistic view of electrical resistance 1 C 4 1,2,3 29. Schrodinger equation and self consistent field 1 C 4 1,2,3 30. Band Structure 1 C 4 1,2,3 31. Level broadening 1 C 4 1,2,3 32. Coherent transport 1 C 4 1,2,3 33. Non-coherent transport in molecular electronics devices 1 C 4 1,2,3 Molecular devices and logic switches, Interface engineering 34. 1 C,D 4 1,2,3 issues Unit V: Nanoelectronics Simulation 8 35. Introduction to computational methods 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6 36. Molecular wire conductance 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6 Some theoretical and computational aspects on molecular 37. 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6 conductance 38. Various modeling techniques 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6 39. Monte Carlo method 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6 40. Ab initio simulations 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6 41. Multi scale modeling 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6 42. Modeling of nanodevices, Applications 1 C 5 1,2,3,5,6 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. George W. Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Prentice Hall, 2007 V. Mitin, V. Kochelap, and M. Stroscio, “Introduction to Nanoelectronics”, Cambridge University Press, 2. 2008 3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material Karl Goser et.al, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum devices”, 4. Springer, 2005 5. Mark. A. Reed and Takhee, “Molecular Electronics”, American Scientific Publishers, 2003 6. Michael. C. Petty, “Molecular Electronics: From Principles to Practice”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2007 7. K. I. Ramachandran et.al, “Computational Chemistry and Molecular Modeling”, Springer, 2008

36 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT304L NANOELECTRONICS SIMULATION LABORATORY 0 0 2 1 Co-requisite: 15NT304 Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanoelectronics Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The main goal of this course is to make learner gain knowledge of designing and fabrication process which is Purpose essential for simulation of nanoelectronic devices. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the basic concepts involved in nanoelectronics devices using MATLAB b k 2. Gain adequate knowledge in designing of electronics device using PSpice b k 3. Familiarize themselves with simulation process involved in nanoelectronics device b k 4. Understand the characteristics of nanoelectronics device using simulation tool b k

Sl. Contact C-D-I- Description of experiments IOs Reference No. hours O 1. Determination of electron concentration versus temperature using MATLAB 2 D,I,O 1 1,2 Determination of electron (μ ) and hole (μ ) mobilities versus doping 2. n p 2 D,I,O 1 1,2 concentration in semiconductor using MATLAB 3. Determination of Fermi function for different temperature using MATLAB 2 D,I,O 1 1,2 Numerical solution of the one dimensional Schrodinger wave equation of a time 4. 2 D,I,O 1 1,2 independent system using MATLAB program 5. PSpice simulation of diode and its I-V characteristics with smoke analysis 2 D,I,O 2 1,3 6. PSpice simulation of BJT and its I-V characteristics 2 D,I,O 2 1,3 7. PSpice simulation of FET and its I-V characteristics 2 D,I,O 2 1,3 8. PSpice simulation of CMOS and its I-V characteristics 2 D,I,O 2 1,3 9. Simulation of diode using TCAD and its characterization 2 D,I,O 3,4 1,4,5 10. Designing of 2D MOSFET using TCAD 2 D,I,O 3,4 1,4,5 Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 30

Learning Resources Sl. No. References 1. Nanoelectronics simulation laboratory course manual, 2016 2. Sarhan. M. Musa, “Computational Nanotechnology: Modeling and Applications with MATLAB”, CRC Press, 2011 3. John O. Attia, “Electronics and Circuit Analysis using Matlab”, CRC Press, 2001 4. Mitchell A. Thornton, “PSpice for Circuit Theory and Electronic Devices”,Morgan& Claypool Publishers series Simon Li and Yue Fu, “3D TCAD Simulation for Semiconductor Processes, Devices and Optoelectronics”, Springer, 5. 2012

37 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT305 Micro and Nanofabrication 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanofabrication Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To deal with the aspects of the technology of processing procedures involved in the fabrication of Purpose micro and nanoelectronic devices Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Provide learners a systematic overview of micro and nano 1. a fabrication processes Gain understanding of lithography, etching and ion implantation 2. a b c methods to fabricate, structure and modify the layer Understand thin film fabrication techniques including PVD and 3. a b CVD and to apply the knowledge to film formation Apply the knowledge of microfabrication technology to the fields 4. b of general microelectronics systems

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I : Crystal Growth, Epitaxy and Oxidation 9 1. Introduction to IC fabrication 1 C 1 1,2 Electronic grade silicon – crystal plane and orientation – 2. 1 C 1,4 1,2 defects in the lattice 3. Czochralski crystal growing 1 C 1,4 1,2 4. Silicon shaping – processing consideration 1 C 1,4 1,2 5. Vapour phase epitaxy – liquid phase epitaxy 1 C 1,4 1,2 Selective epitaxy - molecular beam epitaxy - epitaxial 6. 1 C 1,4 1,2 evaluation 7. Growth mechanism and kinetics 1 C,D 1,4 1,2 Thin oxides – oxidation techniques and systems – oxide 8. 1 C,D 1,4 1,2 properties Redistribution of dopants at interface – oxidation of 9. 1 C 1.4 1,2 polysilicon – Oxidation induced effects Unit II: Lithography, Wet and Dry Etching 9 10. Optical lithography 1 C,D 1,2,4 1,2 11. Mask Making 1 C,D 1,2,4 1,2 12. Electron lithography 1 C 1,2,4 1,2 13. X-ray lithography 1 C 1,2,4 1,2 14. Ion lithography – plasma properties 1 C 1,2,4 1,2 15. Feature size control and anisotropie etch mechanism 1 C 1,2.4 1,2 16. Lift off techniques 1 C,D 1,2,4 1,2 17. Plasma reactor – Fl2&Cl2 based etching 1 C 1,2,4 1,2 18. Relative plasma etching techniques and equipment 1 C 1,2,4 1,2 Unit III: Deposition, Diffusion &Ion Implantation 8 19. Deposition process 1 C 1,3,4 1,2 20. Physical vapour deposition - sputtering 1 C 1,3,4 1,2 21. Polysilicon - plasma assisted deposition 1 C 1,3,4 1,2 Models of diffusion in solids – Fick’s one dimensional 22. 1 C,D 1,3,4 1,2 diffusion equation – atomic diffusion mechanism 23. Carrier recovery due to annealing 1 C 1,3,4 1,2 24. Implantation equipment – annealing -shallow junction 1 C 1,3,4 1,2 25. High energy implantation 1 C,D 1,3,4 1,2 26. Metallization applications, Metallization choices – patterning 1 C 1,3,4 1,2

38 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

– metallization problems Unit IV: Device and Mos Circuit Fabrication 8 27. Isolation – p-n junction isolation 1 C 1-4 1-3 28. Self alignment – local oxidation 1 C 1-4 1-3 29. Trench techniques – planarization 1 C 1-4 1-3 30. Chemical- mechanical polishing – metallization and gettering 1 C 1-4 1-3 Basic MOS device considerations – MOS transistor Layout 31. 1 C,D 1-4 1-3 and design rules Metal - gate transistor layout – polysilicon-gate transistor 32. 1 C,D 1-4 1-3 layout -channel length and width biases 33. CMOS technology - CMOS isolation and latch up 1 C 1-4 1-3 Silicon - on –Insulator devices , State-of- the art and advanced 34. 1 C 1-4 1-3 CMOS technologies. Unit V: Toward Molecular Nanotechnology 8 35. Directed self-assembly: device assembly 1 C 1-4 5-7 36. Electrostatic self-assembly 1 C 1-4 5-7 37. Templated self-assembly: colloids and nanoparticle 1 C 1-4 4-6 Templated self-assembly: block copolymers and DNA 38. 1 C 1-4 4-6 nanostructures Scanning probe lithographic techniques: local anodic 39. 1 C 1-4 4-6 oxidation 40. Scribing 1 C 1-4 4-6 41. Atomic manipulation by SPM 1 C,D 1-4 4-6 Erasable electrostatic lithography, Electronics with nanotubes, 42. 1 C 1-4 4-6 nanowires, and carbon-60 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books, Reference Books/Other Reading Material 1. Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010 2. Sorab. K. Gandhi, "VLSI Fabrication and Principles", McGraw Hill, 2005 3. Richard C.Jaeger, “Introduction to Microelectronic Fabrication”, Prentice hall, 2002 4. Bo Cui, “Recent advances in Nanofabrication Techniques and Applications”, InTech Publisher, 2011 A G Davies and J M T Thompson, “Advances in Nanoengineering Electronics, Materials and 5. Assembly”,Imperial College Press, 2007 6. Michael Pycraft Hughes , “Nanoelectromechanics in Engineering and Biology”, by CRC Press LLC, 2003

39 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT305L Micro and Nanofabrication Laboratory 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: 15NT305 Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanofabrication Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To gain knowledge in Micro and Nano fabrication Processes Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Gain basic knowledge on micro and nanofabrication processes used 1. a c k electronic devices Develop understanding of fundamental issues, ideas and results 2. a b c k involved in microfabrication 3. Acquire experience in micro-fabrication processes k c 4. Provide basic knowledge in Thin film fabrication k e

Contact Sl. No. Description of experiments C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours To perform wafer cleaning processes followed for VLSI 1 3 I,O 1-4 1-5 applications To oxidize silicon under O ambient using temperature 2 2 3 D,I,O 1-4 1-5 controlled furnace 3 To deposit Al thin film on the oxidized silicon surface 3 I,O 1-4 1-5 4 To perform patterning by photolithography process 3 I,O 1-4 1-5 To perform wet chemical etching of silicon dioxide and 5 3 I,O 1-4 1-5 metal thin films. 6 To fabricate MOS capacitor and study its I-V characteristics 3 D,I,O 1-4 1-5 7 To pattern nanostructures using E-Beam lithography 3 I,O 1-4 1-5 To analyze nanostructures defined by E-Beam lithography 8 3 I,O 1-4 1-5 using AFM 9 To do nanolithography by scanning probe microscopy 3 I,O 1-4 1-5 Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. References 1 Micro and Nano Fabrication Laboratory Course Material, 2016 2 Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010 3 Sorab. K. Gandhi, "VLSI Fabrication and Principles", McGraw Hill, 2005 4 Richard C.Jaeger, “Introduction to Microelectronic Fabrication”, Prentice Hall, 2002 A G Davies and J M T Thompson, “Advances in Nanoengineering Electronics, Materials and Assembly”, 5 Imperial College Press, 2007

40 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT401M Multi-Disciplinary Design 2 2 0 3 Co-requisite: Prerequisite: Data Book / Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Students of any specialization at an undergraduate level learn courses related to various sub-domains (Multi-disciplinary) of their specialization individually. They are not exposed to understanding how the various multi-disciplinary fields interact and integrate in real life situations. It is very common that an expert in a particular domain models and designs systems or products oblivious of the impact of other subsystems. This lack of multi-disciplinary thinking is very blatantly visible when the students take up Purpose their major project during their final year. This course aims to develop appropriate skills on systemic

thinking on how to identify and formulate a problem, decompose the problem into smaller elements, coneptualise the design, evaluate the conceptual design by using scientific, engineering and managerial tools, select, analyze and interpret the data, consideration of safety, socio-politico-cultural, risks and hazards, disposal, regional and national laws, costing and financial model and undertake documentation and finally presentation. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able To subdivide a complex system into smaller disciplinary models, 1. manage their interfaces and reintegrate them into an overall a c e f i l system model To rationalize a system architecture or product design problem by 2. a c e f i l selecting appropriate design variables, parameters and constraints To design for value and quantitatively assess the expected 3. a c e f i l lifecycle cost of a new system or product To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a presentation in a 4. a c e f i l professional manner, and document all aspects of design work.

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours 1 Introduction: Facilitating Multidisciplinary Projects 2 Identifying and formulating a problem 3 System Modelling Thinking perspectives: Decomposition–Composition Thinking Hierarchical Thinking, Organizational Thinking, Life-Cycle 4 Thinking, Safety Thinking, Risk Thinking, Socio-politico-cultural thinking, Environment thinking 5 Decomposing a system – Identifying the major sub-systems Mathematical Modeling and Governing equations for each sub 6 C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4 systems 7 Objectives, Constraints and Design Variables 8 Conceptual Design Collaborative Design – Disciplinary teams satisfy the local 9 constraints while trying to match the global constraints set by the project coordinator. Tools for modeling, designing, analysis, data interpretation, 10 decision making etc 11 Design Analysis, evaluation and selection

41 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

12 Costing and Financial model

13 Documentation, reviewing and presentation Total contact hours 60

Learning Resources Sl. No. References 1. Systems Design and Engineering: Facilitating Multidisciplinary Development Projects G. Maarten Bonnema, Karel T. Veenvliet, Jan F. Broenink December 15, 2015, CRC Press ISBN 9781498751261 2. Exploring Digital Design-Multi-Disciplinary Design Practices, Ina Wagner , Tone Bratteteig , Dagny Stuedahl, Springer-Verlag London, 2010, ISSN:1431-1496

Additional references can be included by the respective departments based on the domain and / or theme.

Course nature Predominantly Practice complimented by theory

Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Review 4 Total In-semester Weightage 10% 25% 25% 40% 100% End semester examination Weightage : 0%

Pedagogy: Theme or major/broad domains will be announced by the department every semester. Multi-disciplinary designs will be made by the students in groups (group size may be decided by the course coordinator), with the topic of interest falling within the theme or major/broad domains as announced by the department, applying any combinations of the disciplines in engineering. 3D modelling and / or simulation must be used to validate the design.

In a combination of lecture and hands-on experiences, students must be exposed to understand and analyse engineering designs (or products) and systems, their realization process and project management. Analysis of the design criteria for safety, ergonomics, environment, life cycle cost and sociological impact is to be covered. Periodic oral and written status reports are required. The course culminates in a comprehensive written report and oral presentation. If required guest lecturers from industry experts from the sub-domains may be arranged to provide an outside perspective and show how the system design is being handled by the industry. The Conceive Design Implement Operate (CDIO) principles must be taught to the students.

A full-scale fabrication is not within the purview /scope of this course. Of course this design, if scalable and approved by the department, can be extended as the major project work

This course is 100% internal continuous assessment.

42 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT403 Nanomagnetism 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The course aims at providing the solid basis in magnetism required to know the fundamentals at the atomic/sub-atomic levels, and understand the magnetic properties of nanostructures. The Purpose fundamental concepts could be illustrated by the recent examples along with the contemporary knowledge Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Address the intrinsic properties of materials and to correlate them with a e the extrinsic factors 2. Know which nanomagnetic materials of various structures and dimensions and also will help to understand the their characterizations a methodologies 3. Develop a deep knowledge about the magnetic nanoparticles, self assembly of magnetic nanoparticles, magnetic clusters, assembled a c nanoparticles and nanobiomagnetics and their application in various fields 4. Learners should be able to provide physical explanation in key concepts of transport phenomena involved in electron spins in magnetic resistance c effects

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Basic of Nanomagnetism 9 Basis of magnetism – diamagnetism, paramagnetism, 1. 1 C 1-4 1 ferromagnetism, antiferomagnetism, ferrimagnetism 2. The hysteresis loop, domains and domain walls 1 C 1 1,2 3. Units in magnetism 1 C 1 2 4. Zeeman energy, magnetic anisotropy energy 1 C,D 1 1 5. Exchange energy, magnetostatic energy 1 C 1 2 6. Dipolar interactions, ways to handle dipolar fields 1 C 1 1 7. The bloch domain wall, simple variational model 1 C 1 1 8. Defining the width of a domain wall 1 C 1 1 9. Magnetic anisotropy, crystal anisotropy, shape anisotropy 1 C 1,3 2 Unit II – Magnetism and Magnetic Domain in Low 9 Dimensions 10. Magnetic ordering in low dimensions 1 C 2,3 1 11. Dipolar anisotropy 1 C 2,3 1 12. Interface magnetic anisotropy 1 C 1,2,3 1 13. Magnetoelastic anisotropy 1 C 2,3 1 14. Domain wall angle 1 C 1,2 1 15. Vortices and antivortex 1 C 2 1 16. Films with out-of-plane anisotropy 1 C 2 1 17. Domains in nanostructures with in-plane magnetization 1 C 2 1 18. Domains in nanostructures with out-of-plane magnetization 1 C 2,3 1 Unit III – Nanosized Magnetic Materials 8 19. Magnetism of thin films and multilayers 1 C 3 2 20. Thin Films: planar systems, laterally structured systems and 1 C 3 2

43 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

anisotropy in thin films Domain walls and magnetization reversal in thin films, exchange 21. 1 C 3 2 bias 22. Nanoparticles from multilayer precursors 1 C 3 2 Formation and superstructural development of epitaxially grown 23. 1 C 3 2 FePt Nanoparticles 24. Self-assembly of magnetic nanoparticles 1 C 3 2 Cluster-assembled nanoparticles, experiment for cluster 25. 1 C 3 2 preparation 26. Elemental and alloy clusters- FePt and CoPt nanoclusters 1 C 3 2 Unit IV: Characterization and Applications of Nanomagnets 8 27. Introduction to electron microscopy methods 1 C 2 2 28. Nanostructured magnetic materials 1 C 2 2 29. Magnetic recording principles of magnetic recording 1 C 3 1 Novel magnetic recording systems - nanodisk and nanoring 30. 1 C 3 1 memories 31. Domain wall memories 1 C 3 1 32. Targeting-magnetic separation 1 C 3 2 33. Magnetic tweezers-drug and gene delivery 1 C 3 2 34. Magnetic resonance imaging, Magneto transport 1 C 3 2 Unit V: Magnetotransport and Spin Electronics 8 35. Introduction to magnetotransport 1 C 4 1 36. Spin dependent scattering and giant magneto resistance 1 C 4 1 37. Valet–Fert model for GMR 1 C 4 1 38. Tunnel Magneto Resistance (TMR) 1 C 4 1 39. Nanostructures for spin electronics - basics 1 C 4 2 40. Read heads and magnetic data storage 1 C 4 2 41. Magnetic random access memories 1 C 4 2 42. Spintronic biosensors and Spin transistors 1 C 4 2 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material 1 Alberto P. Guimaraes, “Principles of Nanomagnetism”, XII, Springer Berlin Heidelberg New York, 2009 2 David Sellmyer, Ralph Skomski, “Advanced Magnetic Nanostructures”, Springer Heidelberg, 2010

44 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT404 Polymer and Nanocomposites 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose The purpose of this course is to provide a basic knowledge about polymer and the composite materials. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the basics of polymer science a 2. Gain knowledge on theoretical background about nanocomposites e 3. Gain insight about the importance of polymers in nanotechnology e

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introduction to Polymers 9 1. Importance of polymers: basic concept 1 C 1,3 1,2 Classification of polymers on the basis of microstructures 2. 1 C 1 1,2 macrostructures and properties, application 3. Chain structure and configuration 1 C 1 1,2 Homo and heteropolymers - copolymers-chemistry of 4. 1 C 1 1,2 polymerization Characterization of polymers-molecular, solution, melt, elastomer, 5. 1 C 1,3 1,2 solid state, surface, interface Properties: glass transition temperature (Tg) and melting point 6. 1 C,D 1,3 1,2 (Tm),Factors affecting Tg and Tm, Importance of Tg Molecular weights and degree of polymerization- reactions and 7. 1 C,D 1,3 1,2 kinetics of polymerization Properties- mechanical, dielectric constant, polarization; Dissipation 8. 1 C 2 1,2 factor Polymeric nanostructure- ordered polymer, block co-polymer, 9. 1 C 1,2 1,2 surface micelles Unit II: Metal – Polymer nanocomposites 9 10. Physical and chemical properties of nanosized metal particles 1 C 1,2 2,3 Metal containing polymers: cryochemical synthesis, structure and 11. 1 C 1,2 2,3 physio-chemical properties 12. Controlled pyrolysis of metal containing precursors 1 C 1,2 2,3 13. Nanostructured polymer nanoreactors for metal particle formation 1 C 1,2 2,3 14. Metal-polymer nanocomposite synthesis, Ex-situ, In-situ 1 C 1,2 2,3 15. Plasmon absorption of embedded nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 2,3 Magnetooptics of granular nano materials, New optical method of 16. 1 C 1,2 2,3 magnetic nanoparticles and nanostructures imaging Optical extinction of metal nano particles synthesized in polymer by 17. 1 C 1,2 2,3 ion implantation 18. Optically anisotropic metal polymer nanocomposites 1 C 1,2 2,3 Unit III: Polymer Matrix Nanocomposites 8 Polymer/ clay nanocomposites: synthesis of NCH composites and 19. 1 C 1-3 4 characterization 20. Crystal structure of NCH, properties of NCH 1 C 1-3 4 21. Polypropylene layered silicate nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 4 22. Epoxy nanocomposite system, future trends 1 C 1-3 4 Biodegradable polymer/layered silicate nanocomposites- categories, 23. 1 C 1-3 4 properties, drawback Polymer layer silicate nanocomposites- technology, structure, 24. 1 C 1-3 4 properties and characterisation

45 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Poly(ethyl acrylate)/bentonitenano composites and Poly(butylene 25. 1 C 1-3 4 terephthlate) (PBT) based nanocomposites 26. Polymer/calcium carbonate nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 4 Unit IV: Metal Matrix Nanocomposites 8 Introduction to metal matrix composites, reinforcements, matrix 27. 1 C 2 5 materials 28. Mechanism of reinforcement- long fiber, short fiber, particulate 1 C,D 2 5 Interlayer in metal matrix composites-characterization and relevance 29. 1 C,D 2 5 to material properties Processing of nanocomposites- Liquid Processes, Semi-Solid 30. 1 C 2 5 Processes, Solid Processes 31. Production of composite by thermal coating process 1 C 2 5 Structure and properties of sprayed coatings, adhesion of thermally 32. 1 C 2 5 sprayed coating Machinability aspects of metal matrix composites, Mechanical 33. 1 C 2 5 behavior and fatigue properties of MMC 34. Strengthening mechanisms, application 1 C 2 5 Unit V: Ceramic Matrix Nanocomposites 8 Introduction to ceramic matrix composites, fibrous monolithic 35. 1 C 2 6 ceramic, fiber reinforced 36. Whisker reinforced ceramic matrix composite 1 C 2 6 37. Particulate reinforced, graded and layered ceramic composite 1 C 2 6 38. Nanophase ceramic composites 1 C 2 6 Processing- microstructural control of metal reinforced ceramic 39. 1 C 2 6 matrix nanocomposites Refractory and speciality ceramic composites and interface in non- 40. 1 C 2 6 oxide ceramic composites Machinable nanocomposite ceramics- Silicon nitride and silicon 41. 1 C 2 6 carbide based ceramics 42. Functionally graded ceramics- clay nanocomposites 1 C 2 6 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material Gowariker V.R., Viswanathan N.V., Sreedhar J., “Polymer Science”, New age International publications, 1. 2005 Alfred Rudin, “The elements of polymer science and engineering”, 2nd edition, Academic press publication, 2. 1999 3. Luigi Nicolais, Gianfranco Carotenuto,“Metal–polymerNanocomposites”,Wiley-Interscience,2005 4. Yiu-Wing Mai,Zhong-Zhen yu, “Polymernanocomposites”,CRC press,2006 5. Karl U. Kainer, “Metal Matrix Composites”,Wiley-VCH publisher, 2005 Low I. M., “Ceramic matrix composites: Microstructure, properties and applications”,Woodhead 6. Publishing Limited, 2006

46 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT404L Polymer and Nanocomposites Laboratory 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: 15NT404 Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The purpose of this course is to provide a basic knowledge about polymer and the composite Purpose materials. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Comprehend the fundamentals of polymerization techniques a k 2. Device protocols for nanocomposite synthesis. b k Develop the skills in synthesizing polymer networks and 3. b k hydrogel Make the learner familiarize with testing of thermal and 4. b k mechanical properties of polymer and nanocomposites

Sl. Contact Description of experiments C-D-I-O IOs Reference No. hours 1. Polymerization of Acrylamide in water 3 D,I 1 1,2,3,4 Interfacial Polymerization of polyamide from Diamine and Diacid 2. 3 D,I 3 1,2,3, 4 Chloride. Polymerization of Methyl Methacrylate Monomer to Form Poly 3. 3 D,I 1,3 1,2,3,5 (Methyl Methacrylate). Synthesis of Hydrogels from Acrylamide and N-isopropyl Acrylamide 4. 3 D,I 3 1,2,3,4,5 with Bisacrylamide in Water Study of glass transition, melting and crystallization temperature of 5. 3 D,I 4 1,2,3,6 Polyethylene terephthalate (PET)/ Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) 6. Preparation of metal-polymer nanocomposites 3 D,I,O 2 1,2,3,7 7. Synthesis of particulate reinforced metal matrix composites 3 D,I 2 1,2,3,8 Interlayers in metal matrix composites : characterisation and relevance 8. 3 D,I,O 4 1,2,3,8 for the material properties 9. Preparation of ceramic based nanocomposites 3 D,I,O 2 1,8,3,9 Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Reference Books/Other Reading Material 10. Polymer and nanocomposites laboratory course material, 2016 V.R., Viswanathan N.V. and Jayader Sreedhar , “Polymer Science”, New age International publications, 11. 2005 Alfred rudin , “The elements of polymer science and engineering”, 2nd edition, Academic press publication, 12. 1999 13. http://www.chemistry2011.org/ResourceFiles/6.pdf 14. http://www.chemistry2011.org/ResourceFiles/10.pdf http://www.kompasiana.com/hardiyantoputra/differential-scanning-calorimetry-dsc-analysis-for- 15. polyethylene-and-polystyrene-behavior_54f82215a33311275e8b45a7 16. Luigi Nicolais, Gianfranco Carotenuto“Metal–polymerNanocomposites”,Wiley-Interscience,2005 17. Karl U. Kainer, “Metal Matrix Composites”, Wiley-VCH publisher, 2005 I. M. Low “Ceramic matrix composites: Microstructure, properties and applications”,[[Woodhead 18. Publishing Limited, 2006

Course nature Practical Assessment Method – Practical Component Assessment tool Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total In-semester Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60% End semester examination Weightage : 40%

47 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT405 Industrial Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To provide knowledge of various industrial applications of nanotechnology Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in each industry a 2. Provide instances of contemporary industrial applications of nanotechnology a d e Provide an overview of future technological advancements and increasing role 3. a of nanotechnology in each industry

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Nanotechnology in Electrical and Electronics Industry 9 1. Nano electrical and electronic devices: advantageous 1 C 1-3 1,2 2. Data storage and memory 1 C 1-3 1,2 3. Micro and nanoelectromechanical systems 1 C 1-3 1,2 4. Lasers, lighting and displays 1 C 1-3 1,2 5. Batteries 1 C 1-3 1,2 6. Fuel cells 1 C 1-3 1,2 7. Photovoltaic cells 1 C 1-3 1,2 8. Electric double layer capacitors 1 C 1-3 1,2 9. Nanoparticle coatings for electrical products 1 C 1-3 1,2 Unit II: Nanotechnology In Biomedical And Pharmaceutical 9 Industry 10. Nanoparticles in bone substitutes and dentistry 1 C 1-3 3,4 11. Tissue engineering/regenerative medicine 1 C 1-3 3,4 12. Scaffolds for tissue engineering 1 C 1-3 3,4 13. Nanorobotics in surgery 1 C 1-3 3,4 14. Drug delivery advantages of nanostructured delivery systems 1 C 1-3 3,4 Activation and targeting of nanotechnology-based drug delivery 15. 1 C 1-3 3,4 systems 16. Cancer diagnostics and therapy: why nanotechnology? 1 C 1-3 3,4 17. Nanotools for early cancer detection 1 C 1-3 3,4 18. Nanomedicine for cancer treatment 1 C 1-3 3,4 Unit III: Nanotechnology for Environment Applications 8 Nanotechnostructured catalysts TiO nanoparticles for water 19. 2 1 C 1-4 5,6 purification: background of TiO2 as a semiconductor photocatalyst 20. Photocatalytic mechanism, general pathways, and kinetics 1 C 1-3 5,6 21. Photocatalytic degradation of specific waterborne pollutants 1 C 1-3 5,6 22. Nanoparticles for treatment of arsenic 1 C 1-3 5,6 23. Treatment of arsenic using nanoparticles other than TIO2 1 C 1-3 5,6 24. Nanoscale carbon materials for contaminant separation 1 C 1-3 5,6 25. Nanostructured metal oxide gas sensors for air-quality monitoring 1 C 1-3 5,6 26. The gas-sensing mechanism, integrated solid-state sensors 1 C 1-3 5,6 Unit IV - Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Technology 8 27. Nanotechnology in agriculture 1 C 1-3 7,8 28. Precision farming, smart delivery system 1 C 1-3 7,8 29. Insecticides using nanotechnology 1 C 1-3 7,8 30. Potential of nano-fertilizers 1 C 1-3 7,8 31. Nanotechnology in food industry 1 C 1-3 7,8 32. Packaging, Food processing 1 C 1-3 7,8

48 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

33. Food safety and biosecurity 1 C 1-3 7,8 34. Contaminant detection and smart packaging 1 C 1-3 7,8 Unit V - Nanotechnology in Textiles And Cosmetics 8 Nanofibre production –electrospinning, controlling morphologies 35. 1 C 1-3 9-10 of nanofibers 36. Multifunctional polymer nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 9-10 37. Carbon nanotubes and nanocomposites 1 C 1-3 9-10 38. Nano-filled polypropylene fibers 1 C 1-3 9-10 Nano finishing in textiles (UV resistant, antibacterial,) 39. 1 C 1-3 9-10 hydrophilic, self-cleaning, flame retardant finishes) 40. Cosmetics – formulation of gels 1 C 1-3 9-10 Formulation of shampoos, hair-conditioners (micellar self- 41. 1 C 1-3 9-10 assembly and its manipulation) Sun-screen dispersions for UV protection using Titanium oxide – 42. 1 C 1-3 9-10 color cosmetics Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material Mark A.R., Daniel Ratner, “Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea”, Pearson 1. Education, India,2003 2. Bharat Bhushan,“Handbook of Nanotechnology”, Springer, Barnes & Noble,2004 3. Eelina H. Malsch, “Biomedical Nanotechnology”, CRC Press,2005 Kenneth E.G.,Craig R.H., Cato T.L., Lakshmi S.N., “Biomedical Nanostructures”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 4. 2008 5. Maqhong Fan, Huang C.P., Alan E.B., “Environanotechnology”,Elsevier,2010 Tian C.Z., Rao Y.S., Keith C.K.L., Zhiqiang H.,Tyagi R.D., Irene M.C.L, “Nanotechnologies For Water 6. Environment Applications”, ASCE publications, 2009 Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, “Nanotechnology in agriculture and food production”, Woodrow 7. Wilson International Center,2006 Lynn J. Frewer, Willehm Norde, Fischer R. H. and Kampers W. H., “Nanotechnology in the Agri-food 8. sector”,Wiley-VCH Verlag,2011 P. J. Brown and K. Stevens, “Nanofibers and Nanotechnology in Textiles”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 9. Cambridge, 2007 10. Mai Y-W., “PolymerNano composites”, Woodhead publishing, 2006 11. Chang W.N., “Nanofibres fabrication, performance and applications’, Nova Science Publishers Inc, 2009

49 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT376L Minor Project II 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: Prerequisite: Data Book / Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To obtain an hands-on experience in converting a small novel idea / technique into a working Purpose model / prototype involving multi-disciplinary skills and / or knowledge and working in at team. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able 1. To conceptualise a novel idea / technique into a product c 2. To think in terms of multi-disciplinary environment d 3. To understand the management techniques of implementing a project k To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a presentation in a 4. g professional manner, and document all aspects of design work.

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours An Multidisciplinary project to be taken up by a team of maximum of ten students. Development of prototype product, a 3D model, simulation, blueprint for a larger project and any other development work are permitted. The contribution of the individuals in the C,D,I 1,2,3,4 project should be clearly brought out. A combined report is to be submitted. A presentation is to be made for the reviewers on the work done by the candidate.

Total contact hours

Course nature Project – 100% internal continuous assessment Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Refer the table Total In-semester Weightage Refer the table below 100% End semester examination Weightage : 0%

50 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Assessment components

Assessment Criteria or Expected outcome Evaluators Marks component basis A short presentation to be delivered on:  A brief, descriptive project title (2-4 words). This is critical!  The 3 nearest competitors (existing solutions) and Viability / price. feasibility of Project  Team members name, phone number, email, Panel of the project proposal department/degree program, and year. 0 reviewers Extent of (Review – I)  A description of the product opportunity that has preliminary been identified. To include: Documentation of the work done. market need, shortcomings of existing competitive products, and definition of the target market and its size.  Proposed supervisor / guide Originality, Multi- disciplinary  Mission Statement / Techniques component,  Concept Sketches, Design Specifications / Modules Panel of clarity of idea Review II 20 & Techniques along with System architecture reviewers and  Coding presentation, team work, handling Q&A. Originality, Multi-  Final Concept and Model / Algorithm/ Technique disciplinary component,  Drawings, Plans / programme output Panel of clarity of idea Review III  Financial Model / costing 50 reviewers and  Prototype / Coding presentation,  Final Presentation and Demonstration team work, handling Q&A. Regularity, systematic Final Supervisor progress, technical A good technical report 30 / Guide extent of work Report and quality of work Total 100

51 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT381L Seminar II 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To enhance the disseminating skills of the student about the current and contemporary research Purpose work that are being carried out across the world. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able 1. To understand the research methodology adopted by various researchers h i j To mathematically model a problem, critically analyse it and adopt 2. b c e strategies to solve 3. To understand and present a well documented research e g

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Guidelines for conducting 15NT381L Seminar for B.Tech 1. Upon registering for the course the student must identify a sub- domain of the degree specialization that is of interest to the student and start collecting research papers as many as possible. 2. After collecting sufficient number of research papers the student must peruse all the papers, meet the course faculty and discuss on the salient aspects of each and every paper. 3. The course faculty, after discussion with the student will approve TWO research papers that is appropriate for presentation. 4. The student must collect additional relevant reference materials to supplement and compliment the two research papers and start preparing the presentation. 5. Each student must present a 15-minute presentation on each of the approved research paper to the panel of evaluators. C,D 1,2,3,4 6. The presenter must present one research paper within the first half of the semester (6 weeks) and another research paper in the next half of the semester (6 weeks) as per the schedule. 7. All other students registered for the course will form the audience. 8. The audience as well as the evaluators will probe the student with appropriate questions and solicit response from the presenter. 9. The presentation will be evaluated against 7 to 8 assessment criteria by 4 to 5 evaluators. 10. The score obtained through the presentations of TWO research papers will be converted to appropriate percentage of marks.

This course is 100% internal continuous assessment. Total contact hours

Course nature 100% internal continuous assessment. Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Presentation 1 Presentation 2 Total In-semester Weightage 50% 50% 100% End semester examination Weightage : 0%

52 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Department of Physics and Nanotechnology EVALUATION OF SEMINAR PRESENTATIONS

Name of the Student: Date: Register Number: Degree and Branch: Topic: Sl. No. Criteria for Assessment Evaluator 1 Evaluator 2 Evaluator 3 Evaluator 4 Evaluator 5 1 Understanding of the subject 2 Clarity of presentation Appropriate use of Audio visual 3 aids Whether cross references have been 4 consulted Ability to respond to questions on 5 the subject 6 Time scheduling 7 Completeness of preparation 8

Poor 1 Below Average 2 Average 3 Good 4 Very Good 5

Overall Grades: Remarks: Signature of Course Coordinator

53 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT386L Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) II 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Registration process, Assessment and Credit Transfer:

1. Students can register for courses offered by approved global MOOCs platforms like edX, Coursera or Universities with which SRM partners specifically for MOOCs. 2. Annually, each department must officially announce, to the students as well as to the Controller of Examinations, the list of courses that will be recognised and accepted for credit transfer. 3. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more faculty coordinator(s) for advising the students attached to them, monitoring their progress and assist the department in proctoring the tests, uploading the marks / grades, and collecting and submitting the graded certificate(s) to the CoE, within the stipulated timeframe. 4. Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above department-approved list, through MOOCs must register for that course during the course registration process of the Faculty of Engineering and Technology, SRM University. 5. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will include the MOOCs course registered. 6. The student must periodically submit the marks / grades obtained in various quizzes, assignments, tests etc immediately to the Faculty Advisor or the Course Coordinator for uploading in the university’s academic module. 7. The student must take the final test as a Proctored / Supervised test in the university campus. 8. The student must submit the “Certificate of Completion” as well as the final overall Marks and / or Grade within the stipulated time for effecting the grade conversion and credit transfer, as per the regulations. It is solely the responsibility of the individual student to fulfil the above conditions to earn the credits. 9. The attendance for this course, for the purpose of awarding attendance grade, will be considered 100% , if the credits are transferred, after satisfying the above (1) to (7) norms; else if the credits are not transferred or transferable, the attendance will be considered as ZERO.

54 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT391L Internship / Industrial Training II 0 0 2 1 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Core Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval --- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To provide short-term work experience in an Industry/ Company/ Organisation Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able 1. To get an inside view of an industry and organization/company j 2. To gain valuable skills and knowledge j 3. To make professional connections and enhance networking f g To get experience in a field to allow the student to make a career 4. i transition

Course nature Training – 100% internal continuous assessment Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Presentation Report Total In-semester Weightage 80% 20% 100% End semester examination Weightage : 0%

55 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT491L Industry Module II 0 0 3 2 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Professional Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours 1. The department will identify and shortlist few emerging topics that are trending in industry. 2. The department will identify experts from industry who are willing to deliver modules on the shortlisted topics. 3. The identified expert will assist the department in formulating the course content to be delivered as a 30-hour module, prepare lectures notes, ppt, handouts and other learning materials. 4. The department will arrange to get the necessary approvals for offering the course, from the university’s statutory academic bodies well before the actual offering. 5. The department must officially announce, to the students as well as to the Controller of Examinations, the list of courses that will be offered as industry module. 6. The department must also officially announce / appoint one or more faculty coordinator(s) for advising the students attached to them, monitoring their progress and assist the department in C,D,I,O 1,2,3,4 proctoring/supervising/assessment the quizzes, assignments, tests etc, uploading the marks, attendance etc, within the stipulated timeframe. 7. The Student who desires to pursue a course, from the above department-approved list, must register for that course during the course registration process of the Faculty of Engineering and Technology, SRM University. 8. The maximum credit limits for course registration at SRM will include the Industry Module also. 9. All academic requirements of a professional course like minimum attendance, assessment methods, discipline etc will be applicable for this Industry Module. 10. The course will be conducted on week ends or beyond the college regular working hours. Total contact hours 30

Course nature 100% internal continuous assessment. Assessment Method – Theory Component (Weightage 50%) Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total In-semester Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage 50%

56 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT496L Major Project 0 0 24 12 Co-requisite: Prerequisite: Data Book / Codes/Standards Course Category P Professional Core Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The Major Project experience is the culminating academic endeavor of students who earn a degree in their Undergraduate Programs. The project provides students with the opportunity to explore a problem or issue of particular personal or professional interest and to address that problem or issue through focused study and applied research under the direction of a faculty member. The project Purpose demonstrates the student's ability to synthesize and apply the knowledge and skills acquired in his/her academic program to real-world issues and problems. This final project affirms students' ability to think critically and creatively, to solve practical problems, to make reasoned and ethical decisions, and to communicate effectively. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able To provide students with the opportunity to apply the knowledge 1. a c e f i and skills acquired in their courses to a specific problem or issue. To allow students to extend their academic experience into areas of 2. personal interest, working with new ideas, issues, organizations, a c e f i and individuals. To encourage students to think critically and creatively about academic, professional, or social issues and to further develop their 3. a c e f h i analytical and ethical leadership skills necessary to address and help solve these issues. To provide students with the opportunity to refine research skills 4. and demonstrate their proficiency in written and/or oral a c e f g i communication skills. To take on the challenges of teamwork, prepare a presentation in a 5. d g professional manner, and document all aspects of design work.

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours 1. The Major project is a major component of our engineering curriculum: it is the culmination of the program of study enabling the students to showcase the knowledge and the skills they have acquired during the previous four years, design a product/service of significance, and solve an open-ended problem in engineering.

2. Each student must register to the project course related to his or her program 3. Major Project course consists of one semester and would be allowed to register only during the final year of study. 4. The Major Project may be initiated during the pre-final semester but will be assessed and credits transferred only during the last semester of study, upon completion of all other degree requirements. Generally the undergraduate major project is a team based one. 5. Each team in the major project course will consist of maximum of 5 students. 6. Each project will be assigned a faculty, who will act as the supervisor. 7. The project shall be driven by realistic constraints like that related to economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health & safety, manufacturability and sustainability.

57 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

8. Each group must document and implement a management structure. Group leadership roles must be clearly identified including who has responsibility for monitoring project deliverables and group coordination. 9. A group project may be interdisciplinary, with students enrolled in different engineering degrees, or in Engineering plus other faculties such as Management, Medical and Health Sciences, Science and Humanities. 10. Each student team is expected to maintain a log book that would normally be used to serve as a record of the way in which the project progressed during the course of the session. 11. Salient points discussed at meetings with the supervisor (i.e., suggestions for further meetings, changes to experimental 1,2,3, procedures) should be recorded by the student in order to C,D,I,O provide a basis for subsequent work. 4, 5 12. The logbook may be formally assessed; 13. The contribution of each individual team member will be clearly identified and the weightage of this component will be explicitly considered while assessing the work done. 14. A project report is to be submitted on the topic which will be evaluated during the final review. 15. Assessment components will be as spelt out in the regulations. 16. The department will announce a marking scheme for awarding marks for the different sections of the report. 17. The project report must possess substantial technical depth and require the students to exercise analytical, evaluation and design skills at the appropriate level.

Total contact hours

Project – 100 % Internal continuous Course nature Assessment Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Review 1 Review 2 Review 3 Total In-semester Weightage 10% 15% 20% 45% Assessment Tool Project Report Viva Voce End semester examination Weightage : 25% 30% 55%

58 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT301E Carbon Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To provide an adequate knowledge in various carbon Nanostructures Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the geometry of various carbon nanostructures. a Acquire the knowledge of various synthesis and characterization 2. a b techniques of carbon nanostructures Understand the structure and properties of different carbon 3. a nanostructures 4. Acquire the knowledge of various applications of carbon nanostructures a

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: The Geometry of Nanoscale Carbon 9 Introduction –carbon molecules-nature of the carbon bond- 1. 1 C 1 1,2 new carbon structures 2. Discovery of C60 1 C 1 1,2 3. Structure of C60 and its crystal 1 C 1 1,2 4. From a graphene sheet to a nanotube 1 C 1 1 5. Single wall and multi walled nanotubes 1 C 1 1 6. Zigzag and armchair nanotubes 1 C 1 1 7. Chirality in nanotubes 1 C 1 2 8. Structure and bonding of defective nanotubes 1 C 1 2 9. Euler's theorem in cylindrical and defective nanotubes 1 C 1 2 Unit II: Fullerenes 9 Structure and bonding- nomenclature, C60 and higher 10. 1 1,2 1,2 fullerenes C 11. Growth mechanisms; production and purification 1 C 2 1,2 Fullerene preparation by pyrolysis of hydrocarbons, partial 12. 1 C 2 1,2 combustion of hydrocarbons 13. Fullerene preparation by arc discharge methods 1 C 2 1,2 Fullerene preparation by production by resistive heating, 14. 1 C 2 1,2 rational syntheses 15. Physical properties and chemical properties: hydrogenation 1 C 2,3 1,2 16. Applications of fullerenes: fullerenes in solar cell 1 C 2,3 1,2 17. Fullerenes as donor–acceptor systems 1 C 2,3 1,2 18. Fullerenes as chemical sensors 1 C 2,3 1,2 Unit III : Carbon Nanotubes 8 19. The structure of carbon nanotubes- nomenclature 1 C 1,3 1,2 20. Electronic properties of CNTs 1 C 1,3 1,2 21. Synthesis and production of SWCNTs and MWCNTs 1 C 1,3 1,2 22. Growth mechanism of CNTs 1 C,D 2 1,2 23. Analysis of carbon nanotubes by X-ray diffraction 1 C,D 2 1,2 24. Analysis of carbon nanotubes by Raman Spectroscopy 1 C,D 3 1,2

59 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Carbon nanotubes as Transistors: Field Effect Transistors 25. 1 C,D 3 1,2 (FET) Carbon nanotubes as bio-sensors and gas sensors, Carbon 26. 1 C,D 3 1,2 nanotubes in dye degradation (photo-catalytic activities) Unit IV: Graphene 8 27. Structure of graphene, synthesis, characterization 1 C 1,2,3 3,4 28. Electrical and magnetic properties of graphene 1 C 1,2,3 3,4 Band structure of graphene, phonons and Raman modes in 29. 1 C 2,3 3,4 graphene Layer dependence of Raman spectra, Raman spectroscopy 30. 1 C 2,3 3,4 of graphene under strain 31. Infrared spectroscopy and X-Ray diffraction of graphene 1 C 2,3 3,4 32. EELS of graphene 1 C 2,3 3,4 33. Graphene in solar cell applications 1 C 2,3 3,4 Graphene as Gas sensors, Graphene in dye degradation 34. 1 C 2,3 3,4 (Photo-catalytic activities) Unit V: Carbon Thin Films 8 Carbon thin films introduction: amorphous and crystalline 35. 1 C 2,3,4 1,2 nature Chemical vapor deposition (CVD) diamond: structure and 36. 1 C 2,3,4 1,2 synthesis 37. Physical and chemical properties of CVD diamond 1 C 2,3,4 1,2 CVD diamond as wear-resistant coating and bio-chemical 38. 1 C 4 1,2 sensors Optical applications: infrared windows, lenses, X-ray 39. 1 C 4 1,2 windows Amorphous carbon thin films: amorphous carbon films 40. 1 C 4 1,2 (a:C) and hydrogenated amorphous carbon films (a:C-H) 41. Synthesis of amorphous carbon thin films 1 C 4 1,2 Physical and chemical properties of amorphous carbon film 42. -Amorphous carbon film as anti-reflection and anti- 1 C 4 1,2 corrosive coatings Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. Anke Krueger, “Carbon Materials and Nanotechnology”, Wiley-VCH , 2010

2. Yury Gogotsi, “Carbon Nanomaterials”, Taylor and Francis, Second edition, 2014 3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material 4. C. N. R. Rao, Ajay K. Sood, “Graphene: Synthesis, Properties, and Phenomena”- Wiley-VCH, 2013 5. Wonbong Choi, Jo-won Lee, “Graphene: Synthesis and Applications” CRC Press,Taylor and Francis, 2012

60 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT302E Physics of Solid State Devices 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanoelectronics Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To enable students to understand semiconductor physics and devices Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Enable students to understand the fundamental behavior of 1. a semiconductors 2. Understand and explain principles of semiconductor devices a e Describe the impact of solid-state device capabilities and limitations 3. a on electronic circuit performance

Contact Session Description of Topic C/D/I/O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Solid State Physics and Semiconductors 9 1. Introduction semiconductors 1 C 1 1-4 2. Geometry of crystals 1 C 1 1-4 Elements of quantum mechanics - solution of Schrodinger 3. 1 C 1,2 1-4 equation Energy bands - energy bands in 3D crystals-density of 4. 1 C 1 1-4 states 5. Fermi-Dirac statistics 1 C 1 1,4 Charge - field, potential - donor/acceptor-equilibrium 6. 1 C 1,2 1-3 statistics Carrier concentration, Recombination –generation- 7. 1 C 1-3 1-3 (Shockley-Read-Hall) SRH formula 8. Surface recombination transport 1 C 1,2 1-3 9. Hall measurement – drift-diffusion equation 1 C 1,2 1-4 Unit II: P-N Junctions 9 10. PN junctions - depletion region 1 C 2 1-3 11. PN junctions current - voltage characteristic 1 C 2 1-3 12. Junction breakdown - Zener and avalanche breakdown 1 C 1-3 1-3 13. Capacitance of p-n junctions -transient behavior 1 C 2 1-3 14. Zener diodes-tunnel diodes 1 C 2 1-3 15. Varactor diodes 1 C 2 1-3 16. Metal-semiconductor junctions: Schottky barriers 1 C 2,3 1-3 17. Rectifying contacts-Ohmic contacts 1 C 2 1-3 18. Typical Schottky barriers- heterojunctions 1 C 2 1-3 UNIT III: Bipolar Junction Transistors 8 19. Bipolar transistors-formation 1 C 1,2 1-4 20. Band structure 1 C 1,2 1-3 21. Theory of operation-NPN 1 C 1,2 1-3 22. PNP transistor action 1 C 1,2 1-3 23. Open circuited transistor- biasing in active region 1 C 1,2 1-3 24. Majority and minority carrier distribution 1 C 2,3 1-4

61 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

25. Terminal currents- amplification and switching 1 C 2,3 1-3 26. Schottky transistors, Photo transistors 1 C 1,2 1-3 Unit IV: Field Effect Transistors 8 27. Field effect transistors (FET) 1 C 1 1,2 28. Junction FET (JFET) 1 C 1 1,2 29. Theory of operation and current equation 1 C 1-3 1,2 30. Metal semiconductor FET (MESFET) 1 C 1-3 1-3 Metal oxide semiconductor FET (MOSFET)-working and 31. 1 C 1-3 1-3 V-I characteristics Depletion and enhancement types -threshold voltage -Gate 32. 1 C 1-3 1-3 capacitance Inversion and accumulation layers 33. Complementary MOSFET (CMOSFET) 1 C 1-3 1-3 High electron mobility transistor (HEMT), charge coupled 34. 1 C 1-3 1-3 devices Unit V: Optoelectronic Devices 8 35. Photodiodes-current and voltage in an illuminated junction 1 C 1,2 1-3 36. Photodetectors-noise and bandwidth of photodetectors 37. Solar cells 1 C 2,3 1-3 38. Light emitting diodes, LED materials 1 C 2,3 1-3 39. Multilayer heterojunctions for LEDs 1 C 2,3 1-3 40. Lasers- semiconductor lasers 1 C 2,3 1-3 Population inversion at a junction. Emission spectra for p-n 41. 1 C 2,3 1-3 junction lasers Heterojunction lasers-materials for semiconductor lasers- 42. 1 C 1-3 1-3 Semiconductor laser applications Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1 Streetman, Ben Garland, “Solid State Electronic Devices” Prentice Hall, 2000 2 S M Sze, Kwok k. Ng, “Physics of semiconductor devices” – John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2007 3 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 4 R. F. Pierret, "Semiconductor Device Fundamentals ", Pearson Education, Inc,1996 5 Charles Kittles, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, Prentice Hall, 7th Edition., 2007

62 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT303E Molecular Spectroscopy and its Applications 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To introduce to the students the basic principles of spectroscopy and to lay emphasis on advanced Purpose spectroscopic techniques and the fundamentals. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Acquire knowledge inthe basic concepts of atomic and molecular 1. a spectra. Comprehend the principles of underlying spectra of atoms and 2. a e molecules.. Apply the laws, concepts and principles in problem solving and new 3. a e formulations. 4. Emphasize the significance of various spectroscopic techniques a 5. Expose to concepts and applications of magnetic resonance. a

Session Description of Topic Contact hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference Unit I: Basics of Spectroscopy 9 1. Electromagnetic Radiation 1 C 1 1 2. Absorption and Emission of radiation 1 C 1 1 3. Line width and Line Broadening 1 C 1 1 4. Interpretation of Electron spin 1 C 1 1 5. Interpretation of Nuclear spin 1 C 1 1 6. Born-Oppenheimer approximation 1 C 1 1 7. Translational motion 1 C 1 1 8. Rotational motion 1 C 1 1 9. Vibrational motion 1 C 1 1 Unit II: Atomic Structure and Atomic Spectra 9

10. Structure and spectra of hydrogenic atoms 1 2 1,3 C 11. Atomic orbitals and their energies 1 C 1 1.4 12. Spectroscopic transitions and selection rules 1 C 1 1,4 13. Structures of many-electron atoms 1 C 1 1,4 14. Orbital approximation 1 C 2 1,3 15. Self consistent field orbitals 1 C 1 1 16. Spectra of complex atoms-singlet and triplet states 1 C,D 2 1,3 17. Spin orbit coupling 1 C 1 1 Impact on astrophysics: spectroscopy of stars 18. 1 C 1 1

Unit III: Rotational Andvibrational

Spectroscopies 8 19. Pure rotation spectra 1 C 1 1 20. Rotational transitions 1 C 1 1 21. Rotational Raman spectra 1 C 1 1 22. Molecular vibrations 1 C 2 1 23. Vibration–rotation spectra 1 C 1 1,3

63 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

24. Vibrational Raman spectra of diatomicmolecules 1 C 3 1,3 25. Infrared absorption spectra of polyatomicmolecules 1 C 4 1,3 Vibrational Raman spectra of polyatomic molecules, 26. 1 C 4 1,3 Symmetry aspects of molecular vibrations Unit IV: Electronic Spectroscopy 8 27. The electronic spectra of diatomic molecules 1 C 1 1 28. Franck-Condon factors 1 C 1 1,3 29. The electronic spectra of polyatomic molecules 1 C 4 1 30. Circular dichorism spectroscopy 1 C 4 1 31. Fluorescence 1 C 4 1 32. Phosphorescence 1 C 4 1 Impact on biochemistry: fluorescence 33. 1 C 3 1 Microscopy Dissociation and predissociation, Principles of laser 34. 1 C 4 1 action Unit V: Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 8 35. Effect of magnetic fields on electrons and nuclei 1 C 5 1,2 36. Energies of electrons in magnetic fields 1 C 5 1,5 37. Energies of nuclei in magnetic fields 1 C 4 1,5 38. Magnetic resonance spectroscopy 1 C 5 1,5 39. Nuclear magnetic resonance 1 C 5 1,5 40. NMR spectrometer 1 C 3 2 41. Chemical shift, Fine structure 1 C 5 1.5 Impact on medicine: magnetic resonance imaging 42. 1 C 3 1

Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material 1. Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula Atkins, “Physical Chemistry”, W. H. Freeman and Company, New York, 2010 2. William W. Parson , “Modern Optical Spectroscopy” , Springer, New York, 2007 3. Collin Banwell, Mc Cash, “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, McGraw Hill publishing, 2001 4. Harvey Elliot White,”Introduction to Atomic Spectra” McGraw Hill, 2001 Francis Rouessac and Annick Rouessac ,”Chemical Analysis-Modern Instrumentation Methods and 5. Techniques”, 2007

64 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT304E Nanotribology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL

Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

This course provides the students about the engineering aspects of tribology which one can apply in Purpose product development, failure analysis and condition monitoring. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the basic tribological concepts required for nanotechnology a Identify, formulate, and solve engineering problem of interacting surfaces 2. a e in relative motion Emphasize the knowledge of scientific disciplines in understanding 3. d tribological phenomenon.

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introduction to Tribology 9 History of tribology, origin and Significance of 1. 1 C 1 1,3 micro/nanotribology 2. Tribology in design, methods of solution of tribological problems 1 C 1,2 1,3 Purpose of lubrication, modes of lubrication- hydrodynamic , 3. 1 C 1,2 1,3 Hydrostatic Boundary lubrication, elasto hydrodynamic lubrication, Extreme 4. 1 C,D 2 1,3 pressure lubrication 5. Lubricants - types and lubricating oils 1 C 2 1,3 Lubricant properties-effect of temperature and pressure, oxidation 6. 1 C 2 1,3 stability, thermal conductivity, type of additives 7. Bearings- classification based on mode of lubrication 1 C,D 2 1,3 Bearing-Classification based on relative motion between contact 8. 1 C,D 1,2 1,3 surfaces Comparison of sliding and rolling contact bearing, solving 9. 1 C,B 1,2 1,3 numerical on above topic Unit II: Surface Forces and Measuring Techniques 9 10. Methods used to study surface forces- force laws 1 C 1,2 2-4 11. Surface force apparatus (SFA) 1 C 1,2 2-4 12. Force between dry surface, force between surfaces in liquid 1 C,D 1,2 2-4 13. Adhesion and capillary forces, modes of deformation 1 C,D 1,3 2-4 14. Description of AFM/FFM and various measurement techniques 1 C 1,3 2-4 15. Surface roughness and friction force, Adhesion 1 C 1,3 2-4 16. Scratching ,wear and machining 1 C,D 1,3 2-4 17. Surface potential measurements 1 C 1,3 2-4 18. Nanoindentation measurement, boundary lubrication 1 C 1,3 2-4 Unit III: Lubrication, Friction and Wear 8 C 1,3 2-4 19. Lubricant States, viscosity of lubricant 1 C 2 1,3 20. Fluid film lubrication 1 C 2 1,3 21. Theories of hydrodynamics lubrication 1 C,D 2 1,3 22. Lubrication design of typical mechanical elements, transformation 1 C,D 2 1,3

65 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

23. Parameter of surface topography 1 C 2 1,3 24. Friction of materials, solid – solid contact 1 C,D 2 1,3 Liquid mediated contact, interfacing temperature of sliding 25. 1 C,D 2 1,3 surfaces 26. Types of wear mechanism, Typical test geometries 1 C 2 1,3 Unit IV: Scale Effects in Mechanical Properties and Tribology 8 27. Nomenclature, scale effect in mechanical properties 1 C 1,2 2-4 28. Yield strength, shear strength 1 C 1.2 2-4 29. Scale effect on surface roughness and contact parameters 1 C 1,2 2-4 30. Scale effects in friction – adhesion 1 C 1,2 2-4 31. Two body deformation , Three body deformation 1 C 1,2 2-4 32. Ratchet mechanism, elastic to plastic regime 1 C 1,2 2-4 33. Tribological properties of SAMs, 1 C 1,2 2-5 Tailoring surfaces: Modifying surface composition and structure 34. 1 C 1,2 2-5 for application in Tribology Unit V: Applications of Tribology 8 35. Introduction to various tribological phenomenon 1 C 1-3 2,3 36. Bio-Tribology – Tribology in the human body, artificial organs 1 C 1-3 2,3 37. Tribology in medical devices 1 C 1-3 2,3 38. Natural human synovial joints and total joint replacements 1 C 1-3 2,3 39. Wind turbine Tribology, Biorefining 1 C 1-3 2,3 40. Coating application - sliding bearings, rolling contact 1 C 1-3 2,3 41. Bearings, gears, erosion and scratch resistant 1 C 1-3 2,3 42. Magnetic recording devices, Micro components, MEMS/NEMS 1 C 1-3 2,3 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Textbooks/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material 1. H.G. Phakatkar and R.R. Ghorpade, “Tribology”, Nirali publication, 2009 2. Bharat Bhushan, “Nanotribology and Nanomechanics”, Springer Publication, Second edition,2011 3. Bharat Bhushan,”Principles and Applications to Tribology”, Wiley Publication, 2013 4. C. Mathew Mate, “Tribology on the Small Scale” Oxford University Press, 2008 5. Nicholas D. Spencer, “Tailoring surfaces”, World Scientific IISC Press, 2011

Course nature Theory Assessment Method – Theory Component Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise Test Quiz Total In-semester Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage : 50%

66 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT305E Nanotechnology Legal Aspects 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The aim is to make the undergraduates familiar with the laws, regulations and intellectual property Purpose rights in the field of nanotechnology and nanoscience. Also, the social implications of the nanotechnology and its effect on the environment Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the Intellectual property rights c Give a general introduction to government policies, regulations and 2. c f liability Understand the effect of nanotechnology on the environment and 3. c h human health Make the learner familiarize with risk associated to nanotechnology 4. c and its societal implications

Contact Description of Topic C/D/I/O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Intellectual Property 9 1. Introduction, patents 1 C 1 1-5 2. Patentability requirements, structure of patent, utility patent 1 C 1,2 1-5 Design patent, monopoly powers, licensing strategies and 3. 1 C 1 1-5 arrangements Classification of patent applications, willful infringement 4. 1 C 1 1-5 issues, claim scope 5. Reexamination of patents, patent treaties 1 C 1 1-5 6. Copyright laws – fixation, originality, creativity 1 C 1 1-5 Integrated circuit topographies, industrial designs, artistic 7. 1 C 1 1-5 work – arrangement of atoms. 8. Technology transfer, trademarks 1 C 1,3 1-5 9. Trade secrets and ownership of IP 1 C 1,3 1-5 Unit II: Policy, Regulation and Liability 9 10. Government policies and rules 1 C 1,2 1-2 Quality of information, food and drugs evaluation and 11. 1 C 1,2 1-2 research 12. Classification of medical products. safe workplace 1 C 1 1-2 13. Self regulation. liability – responsibility of a scientist 1 C 1 1-2 14. Civil and criminal laws in nanotechnology 1 C 1,2 1-2 Negligence to nanotechnology – breach of duty causation, 15. 1 C 1,2 1-2 damage and defense 16. Liability for nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 1-2 17. Risk associated with nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 1-2 18. Class action and certification 1 C 1,2 1-2 Unit III: Nanotechnology and the Environment 8 19. Current environmental regulations 1 C 1,3 1-3 20. Classification and sources of pollutants 1 C 1,3 1-3

67 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

21. Pollution – air, water 1 C 3 1-3 22. Industrial waste water, control, quality 1 C 3 1-3 23. Dispersion methods, monitoring 1 C 1,3 1-3 24. Solid waste – industrial 1 C 3 1-3 25. Hospital and hazardous waste 1 C 3 1-3 26. Toxicity, health and safety issues, Health risk assessment 1 C 1,3 1-3 Unit IV: Nanotechnology: Ethical and Social 8 Implications 27. Socio – economic impact of nanotechnology 1 C 1,4 1,2 28. Implications of nanotechnology for the quality of life 1 C 1,4 1,2 29. Short and long term implications 1 C 1,4 1-2 30. Ethical issues in nanotechnology 1 C 1,4 1-2 31. Ethics for artificial intellects 1 C 1,4 1-2 32. Nanotechnology and life extension 1 C 1,4 1-2 33. Nanotechnology for national security and space exploration 1 C 1,4 1-2 Public perception of nano-technological risk, Education and 34. 1 C 1,4 1-2 training public Unit V: Other Legal Issues 8 35. Trade restrictions 1 C 1,2 1-2 36. Taxation of goods too small to be seen 1 C 1,2 1-2 37. Laws for genetic research and rights of new life form 1 C 1,2 1-2 38. Government surveillance, privacy violations 1 C 1,2 1-2 39. Security and eavesdropping 1 C 1,2 1-2 40. R&D regulation 1 C 1,2 1-2 41. Change in industrial design laws 1 C 1,2 1-2 Export – import regulations, Crimes using nanoparticles, 42. 1 C 1,2 1-2 corporate criminal liability, prevention and detention Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. Patrick M. Boucher, “Nanotechnology: Legal aspects” CRC press, 2008 Fritz Allhoff, Patrick Lin, James Moor, John Weckert, “Nanoethics: The ethical and social implications of 2. nanotechnology” Wiley publication, 2007 3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material Louis Theodore, Robert G. Kunz, “Nanotechnology: Environmental implications and solutions” Wiley 4. Publication, 2005 John C. Miller, Ruben Serrato, Jose F. R. C, Griffith Kundahl, “The handbook of Nanotechnology: 5. Business, policy, and intellectual property law” Wiley Publication, 2005

68 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT306E Lithographic Techniques and Fabrication 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanofabrication Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting –2016

To acquire adequate knowledge about various lithography tools for micro/nano fabrication for Purpose micro/nanoelectronics, micro/nano fluidics and MEMS/NEMS. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to a Acquire basic understanding of lithography tools for top-down 1. a micro/nano fabrication 2. Understand the need for various lithography tools a e Gain knowledge about direct write lithography tools and their 3. a e merits and demerits Identify lithography tools and process flow for specific device 4. a e applications

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introduction 9 1. Introduction- micro/nano fabrication 1 C 1 1-6 2. Top-down approach, bottom-up approach 1 C 1 1,2 Clean room, types of clean room, necessity, construction and 3. 1 C 1 1,2 maintenance of clean room 4. Clean room standards, protocols 1 C 1 1,2 5. Lithography- process steps, photo resists 1 C,D 1 1,2 6. Spin coating, exposure, chemical development, optimization 1 C 1 1,2 7. Etching methods: dry and wet methods 1 C 1 1,2 8. Types of lithography-differences 1 C 1,2 1,3,4,6 9. Replication tools, next generation lithography tools 1 C 1,2 1,3,4,6 Unit II: Masked lithography (optical and X-ray) 9 10. Optical(photo) lithography, optical lithography mask 1 C 2 2,5,6 11. Different light sources, contact and proximity exposures 1 C,D 2 2,5,6 12. Diffraction limit and resolutions enhancement methods 1 C,D 2 2,5,6 13. Projection lithography, EUV lithography 1 C,D 2 2,5,6 14. Dose calculation, interferometric and holographic tools 1 C,D 2 2,5,6 15. Lithography masks, laser writer 1 C, D 2 2,5,6 16. Synchrotron radiation for lithography processes 1 C 2 2,5,6 17. X-ray lithography mask, merits and demerits 1 C,D 2,3 2,5,6 Comparison of all masked lithography tools and various 18. 1 C,D 2,3 2,5,6 applications Unit III: Direct lithography- electron beam lithography 8 (EBL) 19. Introduction-maskless lithography 1 C 2,3 1,5,6 Difference between masked and maskless, advantages and 20. 1 C 2,3 1,5,6 disadvantages Principles of electron beam lithography system, electron 21. 1 C,D 2,3 1,5,6 properties 22. Design of electron beam lithography system 1 C 2,3 1,5,6

69 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

23. Operation of electron beam lithography system 1 C 2,3 1,5,6 E-beam resists, resist properties, comparison with optical 24. 1 C 2,3 1,5,6 lithography resists 25. Dose calculation, beam scanning 1 C,D 2,3 1,5,6 Nanofabrication with EBL – NEMS applications, 26. 1 D 2,3 1,5,6 Nanofabrication with EBL – Nanofluidics applications Unit IV: Direct Lithography-Using Ion Beams 8 27. Ion beam lithography (IBL) types 1 C 3 1,2,5 28. Focused ion beam properties 1 C 3 1,2,5 29. Beam scanning, resists for ion beam lithography, process flow 1 C,D 3 1,2,5 30. Focused ion beam lithography- Incident ion properties 1 C 3 1,2,5 31. Principle, design and operation 1 C 3 1,2,5 32. Masked ion beam structuring: Broad beam patterning 1 C 3 1,2,5 33. Atom lithography, applications-Ion beam lithography 1 C,D 3 1,2,5 Nanofabrication with IBL – NEMS applications , 34. 1 D 3 1,2,5 Nanofabrication with IBL – Nanofluidics applications Unit V: Nanoimprint Lithography and other Replication 8 Tools 35. Micro/ Nano replication tools 1 C,D 2,3,4 1,4,7 Necessity, application areas-MEMS/NEMS, micro/nano 36. 1 C 2,3,4 1,4,7 fluidics 37. Soft lithography 1 C 2,3,4 1,4,7 38. PDMS Casting, hot embossing 1 C,D 2,3,4 1,4,7 39. Micro injection molding and nano imprinting 1 C 2,3,4 1,4,7 40. Replication tools- principle 1 C, D 2,3,4 1,4,7 41. Process flow and requirements 1 C 2,3,4 1,4,7 Polymers for imprinting, characteristics and performance, 42. 1 C, D 2,3,4 1,4,7 Master mold preparation for replication tools Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. Stefan Landis, “Nano Lithography”, Wiley, 2011 2. David G. Bucknall , “ Nanolithography and Patterning techniques in microelectronics”, CRC Press, 2005 3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material Chris A. Mack, Fundamental Principles of Optical Lithography: The Science of Microfabrication, John 4. Wiley & Sons, London 2007 P. Rai Choudhury, Handbook of Microlithography, Micromachining, and Microfabrication: SPIE Press, 5. 1997 - Technology & Engineering 6. Cabrini, Satoshi Kawata, “ Nanofabrication Handbook” CRC Press, Taylor and Francis, 2012 Harry J. Levinson, W. R. Fahrner, “Principles of Lithography”, International Society for Optical 7. Engineering, 2005 8. Stefan Landis, “Lithography and nanolithography”, Published by Wiley - ISTE, 2010

L T P C 15NT307E Smart Sensor Systems 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To provide a working knowledge of the foundations and techniques in smart sensor systems. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 6. Comprehend the principles behind sensors a c 7. Appr eciate and understand the applications of sensors a c d

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Sensor Characteristics and Physical Principles of 9 Sensing 1. Sensors classifications 1 C 1,2 1-3 2. Measurands 1 C 1,2 1-3 3. Characterization 1 C 1,2 1-3 4. Smart sensor systems 1 C 1,2 1-3 Physical principles of sensing: electric charges, fields, and 5. 1 C 1,2 1-3 potentials 6. Capacitance, magnetism 1 C 1,2 1-3 7. Induction, resistance 1 C 1,2 1-3 8. Piezoelectric effect, pyroelectric effect 1 C 1,2 1-3 9. Hall effect, Seebeck and Peltier effects 1 C 1,2 1-3 Unit II: Acoustic Sensors , Magnetic Sensors and Mechanical 9 Sensors 10. Acoustic waves, piezoelectric materials 1 C 1,2 1-3 11. Acoustic sensing, saw sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3 12. Sensor applications and future trends 1 C 1,2 1-3 13. Magnetic sensors: effects and materials 1 C 1,2 1-3 14. Integrated Hall sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3 15. Magnetotransistors, other magnetics transistor and future trends 1 C 1,2 1-3 16. Mechanical sensors: piezoresistivity 1 C 1,2 1-3 17. Piezoresistive sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3 18. Capacitive sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3 Unit III: Radiation Sensors Thermal Sensors and Chemical 8 Sensors 19. Radiation basics 1 C 1,2 1-3 20. HgCdTe infrared sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3 21. Visible-light color sensors, high-energy photodiodes 1 C 1,2 1-3 22. Heat transfer, thermal structures 1 C 1,2 1-3 23. Thermal-sensing elements 1 C 1,2 1-3 24. Thermal and temperature sensors 1 C 1,2 1-3 Interaction of gaseous species at semiconductor 25. 1 C 1,2 1-3 Surfaces 26. Catalysis, the acceleration of chemical reactions, Thin-film sensors, 1 C 1,2 1-3

71 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

FET devices for gas and ion sensing Unit IV: Biosensors, Electronic Interface and Integrated 8 Sensors 27. Immobilization of biological elements 1 C 1,2 1-4 28. Transduction principles 1 C 1,2 1-4 29. Lab-on-chip sensors 1 C 1,2 1-4 30. Integrated sensors: system organization and functions 1 C 1,2 1-4 31. Interface electronics 1 C 1,2 1-4 32. Universal transducer interface 1 C 1,2 1-4 33. Microtechnologies: introduction to microsystems engineering 1 C 1,2 1-4 Systems development: methods and tools, constructive and 34. 1 C 1,2 1-4 connective techniques Unit V: Micro-and Nanotechnologies or Sensors 8 Fundamentals of MEMS fabrication: introduction and description of 35. 1 C 1,2 1-4 basic processes 36. MEMS fabrication technologies: bulk micromachining 1 C 1,2 1-4 37. Surface micromachining 1 C 1,2 1-4 High-aspect-ratio (LIGA and LIGA-Like) technology microfluitics 38. 1 C 1,2 1-4 microsystem components 39. Microfluidics microsystem components 1 C 1,2 1-4 40. Nanotechnology: product prospects - application trends 1 C 1,2 1-4 41. Procedures and techniques: the making of ultrathin films 1 C 1,2 1-4 Creation of lateral nanostructures, clusters and nanocrystalline 42. 1 C 1,2 1-4 materials and principles of self-organization and Future trends Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. text books/reference books/other reading material 1. Jacob Fraden, “Handbook of Modern Sensors: Physics, Designs, and Applications”, Springer; 4th ed. 2010 2. S. M. Sze, “Semiconductor Sensors”, Wiley-Interscience,1994 3. Gerard Meijer, “Smart sensor systems”, Wiley, 2008 4. W Gopel, J. Hesse, J. N. Zemel, “Sensors A Comprehensive Survey” Vol. 9, Wiley-VCH, 1995

72 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT308E 2-D Layered Nanomaterials 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The first experimental discovery of 2-D layered materials "Graphene", having unique properties triggered a great deal of attention toward 2-D layered structures. These boost the research in the area of Nanoscience Purpose and Nanotechnology to search other carbon and non-carbon-based 2-D layered nanomaterials. This course provides an overview of this new field "2-D layered Nanomaterials" Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Explain electronic properties of 2D materials, especially Graphene a 2. Explain the different method and can have good basic knowledge a c 3. Describe the difference in various properties due to 2D-layered structure a 4. Describ e various type and application of 2D Nanomaterials a

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Introduction to 2D Layered Materials 9 1. Rise of graphene 1 C 1,2 1,2 2. Atomic structure of 2D-graphene 1 C 1,2 1,2 3. Theory of 2D-materials; reality 1 C 1 1,2 4. Free standing 2D-materials 1 C 1 1,2 5. Electronic structure of graphene: band structure 1 C 1 1,2 6. Density of states of graphene 1 C,D 1 1,2 7. Role of defect and dopant on electronic structure of graphene 1 C,D 1 1,2 8. An overview on physical properties of graphene 1 C 1 1,2 9. An overview on chemical properties of graphene 1 C 1 1,2 Unit II: Synthesis Methods and Raman Shift 9 10. Scotch-tape method (micromechanical cleavage) 1 C 1,2 1,2 11. Chemical vapor deposition 1 C 1,2 1,2 12. Solution-exfoliation – graphene 1 C 1,2 1,2 13. Solution-exfoliation –other 2-D materials 1 C 1,2 1,2 14. Decomposition of silicon carbide 1 C 1,2 1,2 15. Principles of Raman spectroscopy 1 C 1,2 1,2 16. Raman spectrum of graphene 1 C 1,2 1,2 17. Analysis of graphene Raman spectra; D and G band 1 C 1,2 1,2 18. Raman shift dependence on number of layer, defect, dopant etc. 1 C 1,2 1,2 Unit III: Chemical and Physical Properties of 2D Layered 8 Materials 19. X-ray photoemission spectroscopy 1 C,D 1,2,3 1,2 20. X-ray diffraction study 1 C,D 1,2,3 1,2 21. Optical absorption spectroscopy 1 C,D 3,4 1,2 22. Measuring mechanical properties 1 C 3,4 1,2 23. Adsorption properties 1 C 3,4 1,2 24. Magnetic properties, Catalytic Properties 1 C,D 3,4 1,2 25. Metal support interactions: changes the properties 1 C 3,4 1,2

73 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

26. Non-metal support interactions: changes the properties 1 C 3,4 1,2 Unit IV: Beyond Graphene 8 27. Graphene, Penta-graphene 1 C,D 4 3,4,5,6,7 28. h-BN based 2-D layered nanomaterials 1 C,D 4 3,4,5,6,7,8 29. SiC based 2-D layered nanomaterials 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8 30. Si, Ge based 2-D layered nanomaterials 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8 31. Oxide based 2-D layered materials 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8 Transition metal dichalcogenides based 2-D layered 32. 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8 nanomaterials; MoS2

33. VS2, WS2 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8

34. New Materials Ex: Si2BN, BCN 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7,8 Unit V: Applications of 2D-Nanomaterials 8 35. Gas sensors 1 C 4 3,4,8 36. Chemical sensors, Use as smart materials 1 C 4 5,6,7,8 37. 2D materials based membranes 1 C 4 5,6,7,8 38. Oxygen reduction reaction: 2D materials enhance the activity 1 C,D 4 5,6,7,8 39. Hydrogen production 1 C 4 5,6,7,8 40. Electronic devices 1 C 4 5,6,7,8 41. Optical materials, solar absorber materials 1 C 4 5,6,7,8 42. Magnetic devices 1 C 4 5,6,7,8 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. Christoph A. Schalley, “Analytical Methods in Supramolecular Chemistry”, Wiley-Vch Verlag, Berlin, 2012 Paolo Samorí, Franco Cacialli (Editor), “Functional Supramolecular Architectures”, 2nd Volume Set, Wiley- 2. VchVerlag, Berlin, 2010 Donald A. Tomalia, Jørn B. Christensen, Ulrik Boas, “Dendrimers, Dendrons, and Dendritic Polymers: 3. Discovery, Applications and the Future”, MPG books group, UK, 2012 Reference Books/Other Reading Material M. Houssa, A. Dimoulas, A.Molle, “2D Materials for Nanoelectronics”, CRC Press, ISBN 9781498704175- 4. CAT# K24702 Series: Series in Materials Science and Engineering, 2016 O. Frank, M. S. Dresselhaus, M.Kalbac, Raman Spectroscopy and in Situ Raman Spectroelectrochemistry of 5. Isotopically Engineered Graphene Systems, Acc. Chem. Res., 2015, 48, 111–118 M. Naguib and Y.Gogotsi, Synthesis of Two-Dimensional Materials by Selective Extraction, Acc. Chem. 6. Res., 2015, 48, 128–135 Renzhi Ma and Takayoshi Sasaki, Two-Dimensional Oxide and Hydroxide Nanosheets: Controllable High- 7. Quality Exfoliation, Molecular Assembly, and Exploration of Functionality, Acc. Chem. Res., 2015, 48, 136– 143 J-O Joswig, T. Lorenz, T. Berhane W. S. Gemming, G. Seifert, Optics, Mechanics, and Energetics of Two- 8. Dimensional MoS2 Nanostructures from a Theoretical Perspective, Acc. Chem. Res., 2015, 48, 48–55

74 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT309E Supramolecular Systems 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Departmentelective Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To acquire the concepts of supramolecular chemistry and nanoscience are utilized in the design of new Purpose materials. The course provides a short overview of main aspects of nanostructured objects, from the smallest host-guest complexes to sophisticated molecular devices and infinite multicomponent systems. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Gain insight in supramolecular structures and their functionalized associates 1 ability to provide the true assessment of contemporary knowledge of macro- a d molecular studies Apply through feasible approaches, and assemble with the prior knowledge to 2 b fabricate novel designs/architectures Evaluate the needs of sustainable future, develop the supramolecular 3 molecular materials for biological systems and know the roles/functions of c such interdisciplinary fields

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Supramolecular Chemistry 9 Definition and development of supramolecular 1. 1 C 1-3 1 chemistry 2. Classification of supramolecular host-guest compounds 1 C 1 1 3. Receptors, coordination and the lock and key analogy 1 C 1 1 4. Binding constants 1 C 1 1 5. Cooperative and chelate effect 1 C 1 1 Thermodynamic and kinetic selectivity and 6. 1 C 1 1 discriminations 7. Nature of supramolecular interactions 1 C 1 1 8. Solvation and hydrophobic effects 1 C 1 1 9. Supramolecular concepts and design 1 C,D 1 1 Ua.nit II: Host-Guest Chemistry 9 10. Hosts for cation binding 1 C 1,2 1 11. Introduction to coordination chemistry 1 C 1,2 1 12. The crown ethers and lariat ethers 1 C 1,2 1 13. The cryptands and spherands 1 C 1,2 1 14. Host for anion binding 1 C 1,2 1 15. Concepts in anion host design 1 C,D 1,2 1 16. From cation host to anion host – a simple change in pH 1 C 1,2 1 17. Hosts for binding of neutral guests 1 C 1,2 1 18. Inert metal- containing receptors 1 C 1,2 1 Ua.nit III: The Supramolecular Chemistry of Life 8 19. Biological inspiration for supramolecular chemistry 1 C 2,3 1 20. Alkali metal cations in biochemistry 1 C 2,3 1 21. Porphyrins and tetrapyrrole macrocyles 1 C 2,3 1 22. Supramolecular features of plant photosynthesis 1 C 2,3 1

75 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

23. Uptake and transport of oxygen by haemoglobin 1 C 2,3 1 24. Enzymes and coenzymes 1 C 2,3 1 25. Neurotransmitters and hormones 1 C 2,3 1 Semiochemistry in natural world, Biochemical self- 26. 1 C 2,3 1 assembly Unit IV: Methods of Supramolecular Systems and a. 8 Characterization Techniques 27. The extraction technique, the extraction equilibrium 1 C 2 2 28. Principles of supramolecular Extraction 1 C 2 2 29. Examples of supramolecular extraction , binding Constant 1 C 2 2 30. Binding constant determination by UV/Vis spectroscopy 1 C 2 2 Instrumentation of mass spectrometry, Limitations of 31. 1 C 2 2 mass spectrometry Scanning probe microscopes: - scanning electron 32. 1 C 2 2 microscopy 33. Transmission electron microscopy 1 C 2 2 34. Confocal laser scanning microscopy 1 C 2 2 Ua.nit V: Special Class Materials 8 35. Birth of a new macromolecular chemistry concept 1 C 2,3 3 36. The past, present and future of dendrimers and dendrons 1 C 2,3 3,4 37. Supramolecular assembly of dendrons and dendrimers 1 C 2,3 3,4 38. Synthesis of dendritic polymers 1 C 2,3 3,4 39. Characterization of dendritic architectural structures 1 C 2,3 3,4 40. Nanomedical and advanced materials 1 C 2,3 3,4 41. Diagnostics and advanced imaging 1 C 2,3 3,4 Dendrimer based nanopharmaceuticals, Dendrimer 42. 1 C 2,3 3,4 applications and products Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. Jonathan W. Steed and Jerry L. Atwood, “Supramolecular Chemistry”J. Wiley and Sons; 1stEd. 2000 2. Christoph A. Schalley, “Analytical Methods in Supramolecular Chemistry”, Wiley-VchVerlag, Berlin 2012 Donald A. Tomalia, Jørn B. Christensen, Ulrik Boas, “Dendrimers, Dendrons, and Dendritic Polymers: 3. Discovery, Applications and the Future”, MPG books group, UK, 2012 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 4. Helena Dodziuk, “Introduction to Supramolecular Chemistry”, Kluwer Academic publishers, 2002

76 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT310E MEMS and NEMS 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanofabrication Course designed by Department of Physics Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting --, 2016

Purpose To provide an adequate knowledge basic knowledge on MEMS and NEMS Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Acquire the basics of design and fabrication techniques in 1. a c MEMS and NEMS Gain the basic understanding of modeling and different types 2. a c of MEMS 3. Apply in various applications a d

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introduction to MEMS and NEMS 9 1. MEMS and NEMS 1 C 1,3 1,2 2. Micro- and Nanoelectromechanical Systems: Scaling Laws 1 C 1,3 1,2 3. Mathematical Modeling 1 C 1,3 1,2 4. Microsensors and microactuators 1 C 1,3 1,2 5. Mechanical MEMS, Thermal MEMS 1 C 1,3 1,2 6. MOEMS, Magnetic MEMS, RF MEMS 1 C 1,3 1,2 7. Microfluidic systems, Bio-Chemo devices 1 C 1,3 1,2 8. MEMS Architectures 1 C 1,3 1,2 9. NEMS Architectures 1 C 1,3 1,2 Unit II: Micromachining and System Modeling 9 10. Photolithography, structural and sacrificial materials 1 C,D 1,3 1,2 11. Thin film deposition 1 C 1,3 1,2 12. Impurity doping, etching 1 C 1,3 1,2 13. Bulk and surface micromachining 1 C 1,3 1,2 14. Wafer bonding and LIGA 1 C 1,3 1,2 15. MEMS Assembling and Packaging 1 C 1,3 1,2 16. Basic Modeling elements in mechanical, electrical systems 1 C,D 1,3 1,2 17. Basic Modeling elements in fluid systems, thermal systems 1 C,D 1,3 1,2 18. Translational and rotational pure mechanical systems 1 C 1,3 1,2 Unit III: Mechanical and Thermal MEMS 8 19. Principles of sensing and actuation 1 C 1,3 1,2 20. Components: beam, cantilever, microplates 1 C 1,3 1,2 21. Components: capacitive effects, piezo element 1 C 1,3 1,2 22. Measurements: strain pressure, flow 1 C 1,3 1,2 23. MEMS Gyroscopes: shear mode 1 C 1,3 1,2 24. MEMS Gyroscopes: gripping piezo actuators 1 C 1,3 1,2 25. Thermal sensors and actuators: thermal basics 1 C 1,3 1,2 26. Thermodevices, Thermal actuators, Bistable MEMS relays 1 C 1,3 1,2

77 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Unit IV: Magnetic and RF MEMS 8 27. Magnetic materials: properties 1 C 1,3 1,2 28. Magnetic materials for MEMS 1 C 1,3 1,2 29. Magneto resistive sensor 1 C 1,3 1,2 30. MEMS magnetic sensors and actuators 1 C 1,3 1,2 31. Review of RF based communication system-I 1 C 1,3 1,2 32. Review of RF based communication system-II 1 C 1,3 1,2 33. RF MEMS, varactors, tuner/filter 1 C 1,3 1,2 34. Resonators, Switches, Phase shifter 1 C 1,3 1,2 Unit V: MOEMS and Microfluidic Systems 8 35. Principles of MOEMS technology 1 C 1,3 1,2 36. Applications 1 C 1,3 1,2 37. Light modulators , beam splitters 1 C 1,3 1,2 38. Micro lens, micro mirror, digital micromirror device 1 C 1,3 1,2 39. Optical switch, wave guide and tuning 1 C 1,3 1,2 40. Properties of fluids, fluid actuation methods 1 C 1,3 1,2 Dilectrophoresis, electrothermal flow, thermo capillary 41. 1 C 1,3 1,2 effect 42. Micropumps, Micropumps: design consideration 1 C 1,3 1,2 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material 1. Mahalik N P, “MEMS”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008 Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “Micro-Electro Mechanical and Nano-Electro Mechanical Systems, Fundamental 2. of Nano-and Micro-Engineering”, CRC Press, 2005

78 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT311E Surface and Interfaces 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanoscience Course designed by Department of physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The purpose of this course is to provide a basic understanding on surface science of Nanomaterials Purpose related with their properties Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Acquire the basic knowledge on surface science of nanomaterials a 2. Understand the various mechanisms involved in bonding of a e molecules at surfaces 3. Enhance the knowledge on analysis and problem solving methods a e using various analytical techniques.

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introduction to Surface and Interfaces 9 Introduction to surfaces and interfaces - surface energy 1. 1 C 1, 2 1-4 and surface states, surface tension Some basic concepts of bulk crystallography : lattices, 2. 1 C 1 2,3,4 directions and planes Structure of the unit cell and concept of ideal crystal 3. 1 C 1 2,3,4 and surface Surface structure and surface order, surface 4. 1 C 1 2,3,4 crystallography Crystallography of a plane, point and space group 5. 1 C 1 2,3,4 symmetry 6. Unit mesh transformation – wood notation 1 C 1 2,3,4 Unit mesh transformation – matrix notation and 7. 1 C 1 2,3,4 classification of overlayer meshes 8. Electronic structure (for three dimension) 1 C 1-3 2,3,4 Surface states and Surface electronic structure (for two 9. 1 C 1-3 2,3,4 dimension) Unit II: Adsorption and Desorption 9 10. Adsorption and desorption and its types 1 C 2 2, 4 Basics of adsorption kinetics and concept of coverage 11. 1 C 2 2, 4 dependence 12. Coverage dependence derivation 1 C 2 2, 4 13. Temperature dependence 1 C 2 2, 4 14. Angular and kinetic energy dependence 1 C 2 2, 4 15. Thermal deposition and desorption kinetics 1 C,D 2, 3 1,2,4,5 16. Thermal desorption spectroscopy 1 C 2, 3 1,2,4,5 17. Adsorption Isotherms 1 C,D 2 2,4 18. A detailed study and Non-Thermal desorption 1 C 2 2,4 Unit III: Surface Diffusion 8 19. Basic equations -random-walk motion 1 C 1 2,4 20. Basic equations -random-Fick’s laws 1 C 1 2,4 21. Tracer and chemical, diffusion 1 C 1 2,4

79 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

22. Intrinsic and mass transfer diffusion 1 C 1 2,4 23. Anisotropy of surface diffusion 1 C 1 2,4 Atomistic mechanisms of surface diffusion: hopping 24. 1 C 1, 2 2, 4 mechanism 25. Vacancy mechanism, atomic exchange mechanism 1 C 1, 2 2, 4 Tunneling mechanism, Experimental study of surface 26. 1 C 1, 2 2, 4 diffusion Unit IV: Surface Analysis, Electron Spectroscopy 8 Methods 27. Surface specificity – spectrum of secondary electrons 1 C 1,2 1, 2, 4, 5 Photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS and UPS) – physical 28. process: photoemission, spectral feature and depth 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5 specificity Photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS and UPS) - compositional information, elemental sensitivity, 29. 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5 chemical-state information, spectral resolution and depth profiling Modular instrumentation: excitation sources, energy 30. 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5 analyzers and detectors Auger Electron spectroscopy (AES) and ion scattering 31. spectroscopy (ISS): physical process: photoemission, 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5 spectral feature and depth Specificity AES and ISS: compositional information, elemental 32. 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5 sensitivity AES and ISS: chemical-state information, spectral 33. 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5 resolution and depth profiling AES and ISS: excitation sources, energy analyzers and 34. 1 C 2, 3 1, 2, 4, 5 detectors Unit V: Nanoscale Characterization of Surface and 8 Interfaces Scanning tunneling microscopy (STM) – historical 35. 1 C 3 1, 5 perspective and theory 36. STM: electron tunneling and STM imaging 1 C 3 1, 5 37. Scanning tunneling spectroscopy and instrumentation 1 C 3 1, 5 Semiconductor surfaces, Si (111), Si (100) & GaAs 38. 1 C 3 1, 5 (110) 39. Photoinduced process 1 C 3 1, 5 40. Metal – semiconductor surfaces 1 C 2 1, 5 41. Alkali – metal – semiconductor interfaces 1 C 2 1, 5 42. Growth of trivalent metals on Si (001) 1 C 2 1, 5 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. John DiNardo N., “Nanoscale Characterization Of Surface And Interfaces”, Wiley-VCH, 2008 Oura K., V. G. Lifshits, A. A. Saranin, A. V. Zotov and M. Katayama, “Surface Science – An Introduction” 2. Springer, 2013 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. Unertl W.N., “Physical structure” Elsevier Science B. V, 2006 4. Charles Kittel, “Introduction to solid state physics”, John Wiley publications, 2005 5. Riviere J.C and Myhra S., “Handbook of Surface and Interface analysis”, CRC Press, 2009

80 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Course nature Theory Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Surprise Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Quiz Total In-semester Test Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage : 50%

81 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT312E Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Processing 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The course puts together several advanced concepts and topics in an important application of nanotechnology. Students are expected to develop comprehension of the subject and to gain scientific Purpose understanding regarding the role of nanotechnology in the modern agricultural trend and food processing Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand about the interactions at molecular scale a Understand the effect of nanoparticles on agricultural methodology 2. d and food technology 3. Gain knowledge of the types diagnostic tools using nanotechnology c Get familiarized with the new concepts of Nano Science in the 4. d packaging industries and food production Know the toxic effect of nanomaterials used in food processing and 5. d food technology

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Session Unit I: Intermolecular Interactions and Supramolecular 9 Structures Water - hydrophobic and hydrophilic interactions - dispersion 1. 1 C 1 1,2,3 interaction - electrostatic interactions 2. Atoms and small molecules - polymers, particles, and surfaces 1 C 1 1,2 3. Steric interactions involving soluble polymers 1 C 1 1,2,3 4. Depletion aggregation of particles by non-adsorbing polymers 1 C 1 1,2,3 5. Bridging aggregation of particles by adsorbing polymers 1 C 1 1,2,3 6. Stabilization of dispersed particles by adsorbing polymers 1 C 1 1,2,3 Polymer brushes to prevent particle aggregation and particle 7. 1 C 1 1,2,3 deposition at surfaces 8. Organized self-assembled structures - Langmuir layers 1 C 1 1,2,3 9. Lipid bilayers - solid-supported lipid bilayers 1 C 1 1,2,3 Unit II: Nanoparticles in Agricultural and Food Diagnostics 9 10. Enzyme biosensors and diagnostics 1 C 2,3 2,4 11. DNA-based biosensors and diagnostics 1 C 2,3 2,4 12. Radiofrequency identification 1 C 2,3 2,4 13. Integrated nanosensor networks: detection and response 1 C 2,3 2,4 14. Lateral flow (immuno) assay 1 C 2,3 2 15. Nucleic acid lateral flow (immuno) assay 1 C 2,3 2 16. Flow-through (immuno) assays 1 C 2,3 2 17. Antibody microarrays 1 C 2,3 2 18. Surface plasmon resonance spectroscopy 1 C 2,3 2,4 Unit III: Nanotechnology in Food Production 8 19. Food and new ways of food production 1 C 4 2 20. Concerns about using nanotechnology in food production 1 C 4 2

82 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

21. Efficient fractionation of crops - efficient product structuring 1 C 4 2 22. Applications of nanotechnology in foods 1 C 4 2 23. Sensing, packaging, encapsulation 1 C 4 2 24. Engineering food ingredients to improve bioavailability 1 C 4 2 25. Nanocrystalline food ingredients - nano-emulsions 1 C 4 2 Nano-engineered protein fibrils as ingredient building blocks, 26. 1 C 4 2 Preparation of food matrices Unit IV: Nanotechnology in Food Production 8 27. Crop improvement - reasons to package food products 1 C 2,4 2 28. Physical properties of packaging materials - strength 1 C 2,4 2 29. Barrier properties light absorption - structuring of interior surfaces 1 C 2,4 2 30. Antimicrobial functionality 1 C 2,4 2 31. Visual indicators 1 C 2,4 2 32. Quality assessment - food safety indication 1 C 2,4 2 33. Product properties - information and communication technology 1 C 2,4 2 Sensors - radiofrequency identification technology, Risks - 34. 1 C 2,4 2 consumer and societal acceptance Unit V: Toxicology of Nanomaterials in Food 8 35. Characterization of engineered nanomaterials 1 C 2,4,5 2 Unique issues for characterization of engineered nanomaterials for 36. 1 C 2,4,5 2 food applications Safety assessment of oral-exposure engineered nanomaterials for 37. 1 C 2,4,5 2 food application 38. Experimental design considerations for toxicology studies 1 C 2,4,5 2 39. Toxicokinetics 1 C 2,4,5 2 40. Adme (absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion) 1 C 2,4,5 2 41. Toxicodynamics 1 C 2,4,5 2 42. In vivo toxicity & In vitro toxicity - study reliability 1 C 2,4,5 2 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material 1. Nicholas A. Kotov, “Nanoparticle Assemblies and Superstructures”, CRC, 2006 Lynn J. Frewer, Willem Norde, Arnout Fischer, and FransKampers,”Nanotechnology in the Agri-Food 2. Sector”, Wiley VCH, 2011 3. David S Goodsell, “Bionanotechnology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004 Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, “Nanotechnology in agriculture and food production”, Woodrow 4. Wilson International, 2006

83 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT313E Advanced Drug Delivery Systems 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics & Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the advances in the drug deliverance and also to Purpose guide the students to understand how nanomaterials can be used for a diversity of carriers, therapeutic and diagnostic rationales. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Device and develop novel drug carriers with advantages over 1. a conventional therapeutics 2. Understand the effect of varied nanoparticles as drug delivery systems d Get familiarized with the new concepts of advanced techniques in 3. a c therapeutics

Contact Description of Topic (Theory) C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I - Principles of Drug Delivery Systems 9 1. Modes of drug delivery 1 C 1 1 Absorption distribution metabolism excretion 2. 1 C 1 1 characteristics of drugs 3. Kinetics of drug delivery 1 C,D 1 1 4. Controlled drug delivery - site specific drugs 1 C 1 1 5. Barriers for drug targeting - passive and active targeting 1 C 1,2 1 6. Strategies for site specific drug delivery 1 C 1,2 1 7. Time and rate controlled delivery of drugs 1 C 1,2 1 8. Antibody based drug delivery systems 1 C 1,2 1 9. Metabolism-based drug delivery systems 1 C 1,2 1 Unit II - Targetted Nanoparticles for Drug Delivery 9 10. Classification of targeted drug delivery systems 1 C 1,2 2 11. Nanoparticles surface modification – Bioconjugation 1 C 1,2 2 12. Nanoparticles surface modification– PEGylation 1 C 1,2 2 13. Antibodies - cell-specific targeting 1 C 1,2 2 14. Controlled drug release 1 C,D 1,2 2 15. Gold nanoparticles for drug delivery 1 C 1,2 2 16. Multi-functional gold nanoparticles for drug delivery 1 C 1,2 2 17. Virus based-nanoparticles for drug delivery system 1 C 1,2 2 18. Virus based-nanoparticles for targeted drug delivery system 1 C 1,2 2 Unit III - Polymeric Drug Carriers 8 Polymers - classification - polymer micelles as drug 19. 1 C 2 2,3 carriers- polymers nanotubes 20. Magnetic nanoparticles as drug carriers 1 C 2,3 2,3 21. Dendrimers - synthesis – tecto-dendrimers 1 C 3 2,3 Nanoscale containers – nanoscafold systems; Gene 22. 1 C 3 2,3 transfection 23. Carbon nanotubes in diagnosis and therapy 1 C 3 2,3

84 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Liposomes for pharmaceutical and cosmetic applications- 24. 1 C 3 2,3 lipid-DNA complexes 25. Liposomal peptide and protein drug delivery 1 C 3 2,3 Liposomal peptide and protein drug delivery - Liposomal 26. 1 C 3 2,3 anticancer and antifungal agents Unit IV - Nanoparticle Targeted Systems for Cancer 8 Treatment Targeted delivery through enhanced permeability and 27. 1 C 3 3 retention 28. Cancer markers - Folate receptors 1 C 3 3 29. Targeting through angiogenesis 1 C 3 3 Targeting to specific organs or tumor types - tumor-specific 30. 1 C 3 3 targeting 31. Combination therapy and Neutron capture therapy 1 C 3 3 32. Targeting tumor vasculature for imaging 1 C 3 3 Delivery of specific anticancer agents: paclitaxel, 33. 1 C,D 3 3 doxorubicin. 34. Delivery of specific anticancer agents: 5-Fluorouracil 1 C,D 3 3 Unit V - Smart Delivery Systems 8 35. Vascular zip codes and nanoparticle targeting 1 C,D 3 4 36. Theranostic metal nanoshells 1 C,D 3 4 37. Photothermally-modulated drug delivery using nanoshell 1 C,D 3 4 38. Hydrogel composites 1 C 3 4 39. Nanoporous microsystems for islet cell replacement 1 C 3 4 Molecularly-derived therapeutics - transdermal drug 40. 1 C,D 3 4 delivery using low-frequency sonophoresis 41. Nanoporous implants for controlled drug delivery 1 C,D 3 4 Functionalized cyclodextrin nanoparticles, Responsive 42. 1 C 3 4 release system Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books/Reference Books No. 1. Vladimir P Torchilin, “Nanoparticulates as drug carriers”, Imperial College Press, 2006 2. Deepak Thassu, Michel Deleers, Yashwant Vishnupa, “Nanoparticulate drug delivery systems”, CRC Press, 2007 3. Irene Brigger, Catherine Dubernet, Patrick Couvreur “Nanoparticles in cancer therapy and diagnosis Advanced Drug Delivery”, CRC Press, 2002 4. Tejal Desai, “BioMEMS and Biomedical Nanotechnology: Therapeuti micro/ nanotechnology”, Volume 3, Springer, 2006

Course nature Theory Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment tool Cycle test I Cycle test II Cycle Test III Surprise test Quiz Total In-semester Weightage 10% 10% 20% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage : 50%

85 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT314E Nanomedicine 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

This course offers a survey of timely concepts in the rapidly emerging field of nanomedicine. This course Purpose will introduce basic principles underlying nanomedicine and review how nanomedicine is redefining clinical research in areas such as diagnostic imaging agents and nanomaterial-based drug delivery. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, students will be able to 1. Comprehend the principles behind nanomedicine a 2. Gain a broad understanding of concepts and applications of nanomedicine a c 3. Apply concepts of nanomedicine to a focused clinical area of their choice d 4. Acquire knowledge to apply these nanosystems for the diagnosis and therapy. a c

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Nanomaterials for Medical Application 9 1. Carbon nanotubes 1 C 1,4 1 2. Gold nanorods in sensing 1 C 1,4 1 3. Neural prosthetics 1 C 1,4 1 4. Isohelical DNA-binding oligomers 1 C 1,4 1 5. Nanospearing- multifunctional glyco-nanoparticles 1 C 1,4 1 Nanoconstructions based on spatially ordered nucleic acid 6. 1 C 1,4 1 molecules DNA self-assembling nanostructures induced by trivalent 7. 1 C 1,4 1 ions 8. Assembling by polycations 1 C 1,4 1 9. Polymer-based capsules 1 C 1,4 1 Unit II : Regenerative Nanomedicine 9 10. Biocompatibility of traditional medical implants 1 C 2,3 2 11. Adhesive interactions with implant surfaces 1 C 2,3 2 12. Nanorobot immunoreactivity- nanopyrexia 1 C 2,3 2 13. Nanorobot, mutagenicity and carcinogenicity 1 C 2,3 2 14. Thermocompatibility, mechanocompatibility 1 C 2,3 2 15. Cell membrane disruption 1 C 2,3 2 16. Systemic nanoparticle distribution and phagocytosis 1 C 2,3 2 Nanomaterial volumetric intrusiveness- nanobiotechnology 17. 1 C 2,3 2 in tissue engineering Nanobiotechnology for organ replacement and assisted 18. 1 C 2,3 2 function Unit III: Nano-Biomolecules in Biomedical Imaging 8 19. Introduction to biomedical imaging 1 C 2,4 1,3 The emergence of nanoparticles as imaging platform in 20. 1 C 2,4 1,3 biomedicine 21. Magnetic resonant imaging- principle and techniques 1 C 2,4 1,3 22. MRI- working methodology, Paramagnetic contrast agents 1 C 2,4 1,3

86 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

23. USPIOS, SPIOS, MPIOS for imaging 1 C 2,4 1,3 24. Magnetic nanosensors- radio labeled nanoparticles 1 C 2,4 1,3 Acoustically reflective nanoparticles: application in 25. 1 C 2,4 1,3 ultrasound imaging 26. Iodinated liposomes- quantum dots in optical imaging 1 C 2,4 1,3 Unit IV: Nanotherapeutics 8 Drug delivery to CNS - drug delivery across blood brain 27. 1 C 2,4 1,4 barrier (BBB) 28. Nanowires for monitoring brain activity 1 C 2,4 1,4 Neuroregeneration–nanoneurosurgery – nanolipoblockers - 29. 1 C 2,4 1,4 antirestenosis drugs 30. Cell therapy for myocardial infarction - 1 C 2,4 1,4 31. Regeneration of the cardiovascular system 1 C 2,4 1,4 Nanobone implants and scaffolds; Nanocarriers for ocular 32. 1 C 2,4 1,4 drug delivery Nanoparticle drug formulations for spray inhalation - wound 33. 1 C 2,4 1,4 healing 34. Nanogeriatrics – Orthodontal application 1 C 2,4 1,4

Unit V – 3D Bioprinting and Biosensing 8

35. 3D Bioprinting – introduction, principles 1 C 3,4 5 36. 3D Bioprinting technologies: ink jet based 1 C 3,4 5 Pressure assisted, Laser assisted, Solenoid valve based, 37. 1 C 3,4 5 Acoustic jet based 38. Challenges and future development of 3D bio printing 1 C 3,4 5 39. Nanoparticles sensors 1 C 3,4 6 40. Calorimetric sensing – vapor phase sensing 1 C 3,4 6 41. Raman sensing at surfaces – electro analytical sensing 1 C 3,4 6 42. Plasma and optical sensing 1 C 3,4 6 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books Michael Giersig, Gennady B. Khomutov,“Nanomaterials for Application in Medicine and Biology”, 1. Springer, 2008 2. Robert A. Freitas,“Nanomedicine, Volume IIA: Biocompatibility”, Landes Bioscience, 2011 Reference Books/Other Reading Material Jeff W.M., Bulte and Michel M.J. Modo “Nanoparticles in Biomedical Imaging Emerging Technologies and 3. Applications”, Springer, 2010 4. Jain K. K., “Handbook of Nanomedicine”, Springer, 2012 Lijie Grace Zhang, John P Fisher, Kam Leong “3D Bioprinting and Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering 5. and Regenerative medicine”, Elsevier, 2015 6. Stergios Logothetidis, “Nanomedicine and Nanobiotechnology”, Springer, 2012

87 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT315E Microelectronics and VLSI 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanoelectronics Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The purpose of this course is to introduce the basics of the emerging field of microelectronics and Purpose VLSI design Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Make the students familiar with the basics, applications and 1. a implementations in microelectronic technology in integrated circuits 2. Understand the basic concepts of VLSI circuit design a d Understand the underlying physical processes governing the low-power 3. a e VLSI technology

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Fundamentals Of Electronic Devices 9 1. Semiconductor physics: basic concepts 1 C 1 1,4 Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, p-n junction under open- 2. 1 C 1 1,4 circuit 3. Reverse bias and forward-bias conditions 1 C 1 1,4 4. The diode as a circuit element- Basic N-P-N Transistors Action 1 C 1 1,4 5. Ebers–Moll representation of bipolar transistors 1 C 1 1,4 6. Small Signal models of Bipolar Transistors 1 C 1 1,4 7. Small signal Model of JFET Amplifiers: classification 1 C 1 1,4 8. Representation of amplifier, CE,CB and operational amplifier 1 C 1 1,4 9. F/B concept &ideal F/B amplifiers 1 C 1 1,4 Unit II: Digital Electronics 9 Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal number systems and 10. 1 C,D 1 3,4 conversions -Truth 11. Boolean algebra 1 C,D 1 3,4 Tables of logic gates (AND, OR, NOT), NAND, NOR 12. 1 C,D 1 3,4 universal Difference between combinational circuits and sequential 13. 1 C 1 3,4 circuits 14. Introduction to flip-flops (S-R & J-K) 1 C,D 1 3,4 15. Asynchronous counters 1 C,D 1 3,4 Synchronous counters; Memory devices: general memory 16. 1 C 1 3,4 operations 17. Read only memory (ROM) 1 C 1 3,4 18. Semiconductor random access memory (RAM) 1 C 1 3,4 Unit III: Introduction to IC Technologies and Basic VLSI 8 Design Styles 19. Fabrication process flow: basic steps 1 C 2 2,4,5 20. Layout rules- Basic VLSI design styles 1 C 2 2,4,5 21. NMOS, PMOS,CMOS, BiCMOS 1 C 2 2,4,5 22. Introduction to CMOS; Combinatorial CMOS Logic 1 C 2 2,4,5 23. MOS logic circuits with depletion nMOS loads-CMOS D- latch 1 C 2 2,4,5

88 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

24. Edge triggered Flip – Flop 1 C 2 2,4,5 25. Pass transistor circuits 1 C 2 2,4,5 26. Overview of power consumption 1 C 2 2,4,5 Unit IV: VLSI Design Techniques 8 27. Introduction, overview of VLSI design methodologies 1 C 2 2,4,5 28. VLSI design methodologies step by step procedure 1 C 2 2,4,5 29. VLSI design flow introduction to MOSFET- MOS models 1 C 2 2,4,5 30. DC MOSFET models 1 C 2 2,4,5 31. Small signal MOSFET models 1 C 2 2,4,5 32. High frequency MOSFET models 1 C 2 2,4,5 33. Testing : need for testing and testing principles 1 C 2 2,4,5 34. Design for testability 1 C 2 2,4,5 Unit V: Low-Power VLSI Design 8 35. Introduction- Need for low power VLSI chips 1 C 3 2,4,5 36. Charging and discharging of capacitance 1 C 3 2,4,5 37. Short circuit current in CMOS circuits 1 C 3 2,4,5 38. CMOS leakage current, Static current- Power analysis 1 C,D 3 2,4,5 39. Gate-level- architecture level 1 C 3 2,4,5 40. Data correlation analysis- random logic signals 1 C 3 2,4,5 41. Signal entropy – transistor and gate sizing 1 C,D 3 2,4,5 Switching activity reduction; Parallel architecture with voltage 42. 1 C 3 2,4,5 reduction Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. Millman and Grabel, “Microelectronics”, 2nd Ed. Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999 2. Weste N.H., “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design”, Pearson Education, India, 2002 Reference Books/Other Reading Material Tocci R.J., and Widmer N.S., “Digital Systems – Principles and Applications”, 8th Ed., Pearson Education, 3. India, 2001 4. Boylestad and Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 8th Ed, Pearson Education, India, 2002 5. Kang S.M. & Y. Leblibici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits-Analysis & Design”, TMH, 2003

89 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT316E Introduction To Scientific Research 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Research Methodology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The aim is to make the undergraduates familiar with the research ethics and plagiarism. As they are Purpose expected to undertake a research project for fulfillment of their degree, research methodology and scientific writing is included. INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES STUDENT OUTCOMES At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the research ethics and plagiarism c f 2. Understand the importance of honesty and integrity in academic life f 3. Make the learner familiarize with scientific research methodology b f 4. Give a general introduction to scientific writing b

Contact Description of Topic C/D/I/O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Research Ethics – I 9 1. Introduction – ethics and science 1 C 1 1-2 2. Code of ethics - engineering ethics 1 C 1,2 1-2 3. Standards of ethical conduct in science 1 C 1 1-2 4. Global research ethics 1 C 1 1-2 5. Intellectual property 1 C 1 1-2 6. Patent and copy rights authorship and credit 1 C 1 1-2 7. Conflict of interest, error and negligence 1 C 1,2 1-2 8. Case studies – cloning scandal, miracle drug thalidomide 1 C 1,3 1-2 9. Jan Hendrik Schön case and the Baltimore affair 1 C 1,2,3 1-2 Unit II: Research Ethics – II 9 10. Scientific misconduct 1 C 1,2 1-2 11. Forms of misconduct, cheating 1 C 1,2 1-2 12. Plagiarism – recognizing plagiarism 1 C 1,2 1-2 13. Self-plagiarism, ghostwriting, detection 1 C 1,2 1-2 14. Honor code system 1 C 1,2 1-2 15. Prejudice and intuition 1 C 1,2 1-2 16. Observation bias, self misunderstanding 1 C 1,2 1-2 17. Egoism, and some plagiarism cases in India 1 C 1,2 1-2 18. Plagiarism cases in abroad 1 C 1,2 1-2 Unit III: Research Methodology – I 8 19. Good science, bad science and pseudoscience 1 C 1,3 1-5 20. Ways of identification, Curiosity and research 1 C 1,3 1-5 21. Empiricism, rationalism, intuition 1 C 1,3 1-5 22. Authority, Literature review 1 C 1,3 1-5 23. Elementary scientific method - observations 1 C 1,3 1-5 24. Problem identification, basic assumptions 1 C 1,3 1-5 25. Formulation of an hypothesis 1 C 1,3 1-5 Hypothesis driven research design; Identification of 26. 1 C 1,3 1-5 experimental techniques 90 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Unit IV: Research Methodology – II 8 27. Design of apparatus 1 C 3 1,2 28. Experimentation – sampling and measurements 1 C 3 1,2 29. Replication of the data, data analysis 1 C 3 1-2 30. Error of measurement 1 C 3 1-2 31. Classification of errors 1 C 3 1-2 32. Interpretation of the data to test the hypothesis 1 C 3 1-2 33. Mathematical modeling 1 C 3 1-2 34. Numerical computation; Result presentation 1 C 3 1-2 Unit V: Scientific Writing 8 35. Authenticity, accuracy and originality of the work 1 C 3,4 1-6 36. Title preparation; List of authors and addresses 1 C 3,4 1-6 37. Abstract and introduction writing 1 C 3,4 1-6 38. Description of methods 1 C 3,4 1-6 39. Measurements and analysis 1 C 3,4 1-6 40. Explanation of results, discussion and acknowledgement 1 C 3,4 1-6 41. References, paper/poster presentation 1 C 3,4 1-6 42. Electronic publication 1 C 3,4 1-6 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. National academy of Science, National academy of Engineering, and Institute of Medicine, “On being a 1. scientist: A guide to responsible conduct in research”, Third edition, The National Academics Press, 2009 Adam Briggle and Carl Mitcham, “Ethics and science: An Introduction”, Cambridge University Press, 2. 2012 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. David B. Resnik, “The ethics of science: An introduction”, Routledge Publication, 1998 Gary Comstock, “Research Ethics: A philosophical guide to the responsible conduct of Research” 4. Cambridge University Press, 2013 5. E. Bright Wilson, “An Introduction to Scientific Research”, Dover Publication, 1990 Robert A. Day, Barbara Gastel, “How to write and publish a scientific paper”, Cambridge University Press, 6. Seventh Edition, 2012

91 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT317E Nanocatalysts 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Catalysis uses in high impact areas such as improved chemical process efficiency, environmental Purpose remediation and development of energy. So this course will provide fundamental understanding of catalytic kinetics and study of various type nanocatalysts. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Explain reaction kinetics and adsorption and desorption processes a 2. Explain the different type of reaction mechanism a c 3. Describe the most important industrial catalytic processes and catalysts a 4. Describe catalytic processes at nano-levels a c e

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introduction, Concept and Catalyst Characterization 9 1. Rate of reaction 1 C 1,2 1,2 2. Elementary step and rate determining step (RDS) 1 C 1,2 1,2 3. Reaction pathway 1 C 1 1,2 4. Reaction rate in reactors 1 C,D 1 1,2 5. BET theory, total surface area 1 C 1,2 1,2 6. Pore volume and pore size distribution 1 C 1,2 1,2 7. Hg porosimetry method 1 C 1,2 1,2

8. N2 desorption method 1 C 1,2 1,2 9. Overall pore size distribution 1 C 1,2 1,2 Unit II: Adsorption and Desorption Processes 9 10. Adsorption Rate 1 C 1,2 1,2 11. Desorption Rate 1 C 1,2 1,2 Adsorption equilibrium on uniform surfaces-Langmuir isotherms 12. 1 C 1,2 1,2 single-site (non-dissociative) adsorption 13. Dual-site (dissociative) adsorption 1 C 1,2 1,2 14. Derivation of the Langmuir isotherm 1 C,D 1,2 1,2 Adsorption equilibrium on non-uniform surfaces-Langmuir 15. 1 C 1,2 1,2 isotherms 16. The Freundlich isotherm 1 C 1,2 1,2 17. The Temkin Isotherm 1 C 1,2 1,2 18. Activated adsorption 1 C,D 1,2 1,2 Unit III: Kinetics and Mechanisms 8 Transition-state theory (TST), the steady-state approximation 19. 1 C 3,4 1,2 (SSA) 20. Heats of adsorption - atomic 1 C 3,4 1,2 21. Heats of adsorption - molecular 1 C,D 4 1,2 22. Activation barriers - dissociation 1 C 4 1,2 23. Activation barriers - recombination 1 C,D 4 1,2 24. Reaction Model with a RDS - unimolecular and bimolecular 1 C 4 1,2

92 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

25. Langmuir-Hinshelwood mechanism 1 C 4 1,2 26. Eley-Rideal mechanism; Sabatier activity 1 C 4 1,2 Unit IV: Catalyst in Nanoscale 8 27. Noble metals nanocatalyst (Ru, Rh, Pd, Pt, etc) 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7 28. Polymer stabilized Rh and Ru nanoparticles 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7 Oxide supports for nano-catalysts; Carbon supports for nano- 29. 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7 catalysts 30. Gold nanoparticle-based catalyst 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7 31. Gold vs. Palladium catalysts for the aerobic oxidation of alcohols 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7 32. Oxide based catalyst 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7 33. Metal free catalyst (CNT, Graphene, h-BN etc. based Catalyst) 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7 34. Transition metal dichalcogenides based catalyst 1 C 4 3,4,5,6,7 Unit V: Application of Nano-Catalyst 8

35. Toxic Gases conversion using nanocatalyst: NOx 1 C,D 4,5 3,4 36. CO oxidation using nanocatalyst 1 C,D 4 5,6,7 Hydrogenation of compounds with C≡C bonds, hydrogenation of 37. 1 C 4 5,6,7 aromatic compounds

38. Green house gases: CO2 conversion 1 C 4 5,6,7 Dissociative mechanism: oxygen reduction reaction using 39. 1 C 4 5,6,7 nanocatalyst Associative mechanism: oxygen reduction reaction using 40. 1 C 4 5,6,7 nanocatalyst Hydrogen Production using oxide and dichalcogenides based 41. 1 C,D 4 5,6,7 catalyst 42. Photocatalytic reaction using nanocatalyst 1 C,D 4 5,6,7 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. M. Albert Vannice, "Kinetics of Catalytic Reactions", Springer, 2008 Kurt W. Kolasinaski, "Surface Science: Foundations of Catalysis and Nanoscience Second Edition", 2nd 2. Edition, John Wiley & Sons, England, 2005 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. Edited by Ryan Richards, "Surface and Nanomolecular Catalysis", Taylor & Francis, FL 33487-2742, 2006 4. Edited by Didier Astruc "Nanoparticles and Catalysis", WILEY-VCH, Weinheim, 2008 Antonino Salvatore Aricò, Peter Bruce, Bruno Scrosati, Jean-Marie Tarascon and Walter van Schalkwijk, 5. “Nanostructured materials for advanced energy conversion and storage devices”, Nature Materials, 4, 366- 377, 2005 Yan Jiao, Yao Zheng, Mietek Jaroniec and Shi Zhang Qiao, “Design of electrocatalysts for oxygen- and 6. hydrogen-involving energy conversion reactions”, Chem. Soc. Rev., 44, 2060-2086, 2015 Santosh Bahadur Singh, Praveen Kumar Tandon, “Catalysis: A Brief Review on Nano-Catalyst”, Journal of 7. Energy and Chemical Engineering, 2, 106-115, 2014

93 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT321E Nano and Micro Emulsions 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting --, 2016

The course is self-contained and broadly covers fundamental concepts, chemistry and mechanics of Purpose emulsion of micro and nanosize which are used in industry as components in a huge range of formulated products. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 5. Promote understanding of basic principles in chemistry of microemulsion a 6. Develop an interest among students to study about mechanism of emulsions c Provide basic knowledge on formulation and characterization of 7. c microemulsions

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Introduction to Micro and Nano Emulsion 9 1. Introduction to emulsion 1 C 1 1,3 2. Definition of micro and nano emulsion 1 C 1 1,3 3. Theory of emulsion, Micro emulsions 1 C 1 1,3 4. Preparation of microemulsion 1 C 1 1,3 5. Winsor’s classification of microemulsions 1 C 1 1,3 6. Stability of micro emulsions 1 C 1 1,3 Rheology of microemulsion drops -Applications of 7. 1 C 1 1,3 emulsions 8. Ostwald ripening, Flocculation and coalescence of drops 1 C 1 1,3 9. Applications of emulsions 1 C 1 1,3 Unit II: Properties of Emulsion 9 10. A phase diagram approach to microemulsion 1 C 1 1,2,3 11. Microemulsion formation 1 C 1 1,2,3 12. Physicochemistry of W/O microemulsion formation 1 C 1 1,2,3 13. Stability and droplet clustering 1 C 1 1,2,3 14. Phenomenon in microemulsion 1 C 1 1,2,3 15. Percolating phenomenon in microemulsion 1 C 1 1,2,3 Effect of external entity - microemulsions with mixed 16. 1 C 1 1,2,3 nonionic surfactants 17. Microemulsions with mixed nonionic surfactants 1 C 1 1,2,3 Properties of microemulsions with mixed nonionic 18. 1 C 1 1,2,3 surfactants Unit III: Mechanism of Emulsification 8 19. Phase inversion phenomenon 1 C 2 2,4,5 20. Dynamic behavior of emulsion 1 C 2 2,4,5 21. Spontaneous emulsification 1 C 2 2,4,5 22. Recent development with emphasis on self emulsification, 1 C 2 2,4,5 23. Self-emulsification process 1 C 2 2,4,5 24. Symmetric thin liquid film with Fluid interfaces 1 C 2 2,4,5

94 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Formation emulsified microemulsion and microemulsion 25. 1 C 2 2,4,5 properties 26. Characterization of emulsified microemulsion 1 C 2 2,4,5 Unit IV: Formulation of Nanoemulsion 8 27. Nanoparticle formation in microemulsion 1 C 3 2,3,4,5 28. Concept of formation in microemulsion 1 C 3 2,3,4,5 29. Mechanism of microemulsion 1 C 3 2,3,4,5 30. Nanoparticles uptake from W/O emulsion 1 C 3 2,3,4,5 31. W/O emulsion process 1 C 3 2,3,4,5 TiO nanoparticle in mircroemulsion and photophysical 32. 2 1 C 3 2,3,4,5 properties 33. Properties of interfacial electron transfer dynamics 1 C 3 2,3,4,5 34. Interfacial electron transfer dynamics 1 C 3 2,3,4,5 Unit V: Characterization and Application of 8 Microemulsion 35. NMR technique for measurement emulsion 1 C 3 3,4,5 36. Ultrasound characterization for emulsion 1 C 3 3,4,5 37. Ultrasound characterization for microemulsion 1 C 3 3,4,5 Physicochemical characterization and characterization 38. 1 C 3 3,4,5 techniques types 39. Pharmaceutically applicable microemulsions 1 C 3 3,4,5 40. Places of microemulsion and emulsion in cancer therapy 1 C 3 3,4,5 41. In vitro and in vivo evaluation 1 C 3 3,4,5 42. Biocatalysis in microemulsion 1 C 3 3,4,5 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1 Berg J. C., “An Introduction to Interfaces and Colloids: The Bridge to Nanoscience”, World Scientific, 2010 Edited by Sjöblom J., “Emulsions and Emulsion Stability: Surfactant Science Series”, Volume 132, Marcel 2 Dekker, 2006 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3 Monzerfanun, “Microemulsion properties and application”, Taylor and Francis group, 2009 Ghosh P., “Coalescence of drops in liquid, in Advances in Multiphase Flow and Heat Transfer”, Bentham 4 Science Publishers Ltd., 2012 5 Edited by Sjöblom J., “Encyclopedic Handbook of Emulsion Technology”, Marcel Dekker, 2001

95 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT401E Nanorobotics 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: 15MH311 Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting --, 2016

The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of nanorobotics manipulation & Purpose assembly. It will also guide the students to gain scientific understanding regarding the role of nanorobotics in the modern engineering applications. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Understand scientific concepts underlying engineering and 1. a d technological applications in nanorobotics Acquire the knowledge of nanorobotics manipulation & fast imaging 2. d system for advance Nanotechnology applications Get familiarize with the new concepts of real-time nanomanipulation & 3. e assembly using CAD

Contact Description of Topic C/D/I/O IOs Reference hours Session Unit I: Actuation Methods for Nanorobotic 9 Manipulation & Assembly 1. Interaction forces in nanomanipulation 1 C 1,2 1-3 2. Electro kinetic based actuation 1 C 1,2 1-3 3. Electro kinetic manipulation of carbon nanotubes 1 C 1,2 1-3 4. Graphene, nanoparticles 1 C 1,2 1-3 5. Biological entities 1 C 1,2 1-3 6. Laser based actuation 1 C 1,2 1-3 7. Optical tweezers 1 C 1,2 1-3 8. Manipulation of biological entities & chemical entities 1 C 1,2 1-3 9. Piezoelectric enabled actuators 1 C 1,2 1-3 Unit II: Nanomanipulation 9 10. Dielectrophoretic based nanomanipulation 1 C 1,2 1-3 11. Theory- modelling of electro rotation 1 C 1,2 1-3 12. Dynamic effects of fluid medium 1 C 1,2 1-3 13. Nanoparticles by dielectrophoretic 1 C 1,2 1-3 14. Manipulation of CNT 1 C 1,2 1-3 15. Nanomanipulation by scanning probe 1 C 1,2 1-3 16. Reducing atomic scale stick 1 C 1,2 1-3 17. Slip motion ( nanomanipulation) 1 C 1,2 1-3 18. Slip motion by feedback control nanomanipulation 1 C 1,2 1-3 Unit III: Sensing & Fast Imaging System 8 19. Art of compressive sensing 1 C 2,3 1-3 20. Compressive sensing based fast imaging system 1 C 2,3 1-3 21. AFM based imaging 1 C 2,3 1-3 22. AFM based nanorobotic system 1 C 2,3 1-3 AFM based nanorobotic system enhanced by augmented 23. 1 C 2,3 1-3 reality 24. Hardware & software setup 1 C 2,3 1-3 25. Experiments on nanomanipulation of nanoparticles-I 1 C 2,3 1-3 26. Experiments on nanomanipulation of nanoparticles-II 1 C 2,3 1-3 Unit IV: CAD & Real- Time Nanorobotic 8 Manipulation 27. CAD models and CAD models of nanostructures 1 C 3 1-3

96 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

28. Automated manipulation of nanoparticles 1 C 3 1-3 29. Nanorods and nanowires 1 C 3 1-3 30. Limitation of augmented reality system 1 C 3 1-3 31. Real time fault detection & correction 1 C 3 1-3 32. Time random drift compensation with local scan 1 C 3 1-3 33. Interpret on-line fault detection & correction 1 C 3 1-3 Implementation & experimental results ion of the data to 34. 1 C 3 1-3 test the hypothesis Unit V: Nanorobotic Applications 8 35. Wireless capsules endoscopy images and video 1 C 1 1-3 36. Energy harvesting nanorobotic 1 C 1 1-3 37. Capsules robot in gastro-intestinal tract 1 C 1 1-3 38. Nanorobots 1 C 1 1-3 39. Cooperative control design for nanorobots 1 C 1 1-3 40. Cooperative control design for nanorobots in drug delivery 1 C 1 1-3 41. Medical applications of nanorobots 1 C 1 1-3 42. Cancer targeted therapy using nanorobots 1 C 1 1-3 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. Ning Xi, Guangyoung Li, “Introduction to Nanorobotic Manipulation & Assembly” Artech House Press, 2012 2. Yi Guo,”Selected Topics in Micro/Nano-robotic for Biomedical Applications”, Springer, 2013 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. Klaus D. Sattler, “Hand Book of Nanophysics: Nano medicine & Nanorobotics”, CRC Press, 2010

97 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT402E Micro and Nanofluidics 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanoscience Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The goal of this course is to introduce students to the physical principles to analyze fluid flow in micro and Purpose nano-size devices. It unifies the thermal sciences with electrostatics, electrokinetics, colloid science; electrochemistry; and molecularbiology. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Apply advanced matrix knowledge to Engineering problems a Introduce to the students, the various opportunities in the emerging field 2. a c ofmicro and nano fluids Make students familiar with the important concepts applicable to micro and 3. a nanofluidic devices, their fabrication, characterization and application Get familiarized with the new concepts of real-time nanomanipulation & 4. a Assembly

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Microfluidics Microscale Gas Flow 9 Introduction: Fundamentals of kinetic theory-molecular 1. 1 C 1 1 models Kinetic theory-molecular models of micro and macroscopic 2. 1 C 1 1 properties 3. Binary collisions, distribution functions 1 C 1 1 4. Boltzmann equation and Maxwellian distribution functions 1 C 1 1 5. Wall slip effects and accommodation coefficients 1 C 1 1 6. Flow and heat transfer analysis of microscale, Couette flows 1 C 1 1 7. Pressure driven gas micro- flows with wall slip effects 1 C 1 1 8. Heat transfer in micro- Poiseuille flows 1 C 1 1 9. Effects of compressibility of micro flows 1 C 1 1 Unit II: Microscale Liquid Flow 9 10. Micro and nanofluids-Fluid-Nanoscale 1 C 1,2 1,2 11. Applications- Preparatory concepts 1 C 1,2 1,2 Laws, classification of fluid flows determination of transport 12. 1 C 1,2 1,2 properties 13. Continuum approximation and its limitations 1 C 1,2 1,2 14. Kinematics 1 C 1,2 1,2 15. Surface and body forces 1 C 1,2 1,2 16. Navier- Stokes equation properties 1 C 1,2 1,2 17. Two-dimensional Navier- Stokes equation 1 C 1,2 1,2 18. Steady and incompressible Navier- Stokes equation 1 C 1,2 1,2 Unit III: Microscale Viscous Flow 8 19. Introduction: structure of flow in a pipe or channel 1 C 3 2,5,1 20. Posiseuille flow in a pipe 1 C 3 2,5,1 21. Velocity in slip flow (gases, liquids) 1 C 3 2,5,1 22. Flow in a thin film under gravity 1 C 3 2,5,1 23. Derive the thin film under gravity 1 C 3 2,5,1 24. Developing suction flows 1 C 3 2,5,1 25. Surface tension driven flow 1 C 3 2,5,1 Sedimentation of a solid particle, Simple model for blood 26. 1 C 3 2,5,1 flow

98 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Unit IV: Microfluidics and Lab-On-a-Chip 8 27. Introduction - concepts microfluidic devices 1 C 4 4,5 28. Advantages of microfluidic devices 1 C 4 4,5 29. Fluidic transport 1 C 4 4,5 30. Scaling - materials for the manufacture 1 C 4 4,5 31. (Silicon, glass, polymers) materials for the manufacture 1 C 4 4,5 32. Fluidic structures 1 C 4 4,5 33. Stacking - fabrication methods 1 C 4 4,5 34. Surface modifications – spotting; Detection mechanisms 1 C 4 4,5 Unit V: Elements of Electrochemistry, Electrical Double 8 Layer and Applications 35. Electro chemistry, electrical double layer 1 C 4 3,4 36. Electro-chemical potential, chemical potential-acid and base 1 C 4 3,4 Electrolyte, electrical conductivity, semi-permeable 37. 1 C 4 3,4 membrane 38. Micro and nano fluidics devices application 1 C 4 4 39. Fabrication and design of microfluid device 1 C 4 4 40. DNA transport-development of artificial kidney 1 C 4 4 41. Electrochemical sensing 1 C 4 2,3 Receptor and Transducer based classification of biosensors, 42. 1 C 4 2,3 Nanopores and nanopore membrane for biochemical sensing

Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books Terrence Conlisk, “Essential of Micro and nanofluidics: with applications to biological and chemical 1. sciences”, Cambridge University Press, 2012 2. Joshua Edel, “Nanofluidics”, RCS publishing, 2009 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. HenrikBruus, “Theoretical Microfluidics”, Oxford Master Series in Physics,2007 4. PatricTabeling, “Introduction to Microfluids”, Oxford U. Press, 2005 Christof M. Niemeyer & Chad A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Application and Perspectives”, 5. Wiley VCH, 2004

99 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT403E Nanotechnology for Energy Systems 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / - NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The course aims to educate students on the basic and creative concepts of energy technologies in Purpose the aspect of Nanotechnology and equip students in managing these technologies in their future professions Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Understand the basic concepts involved in energy systems and to 1. a explore applications of nanotechnology. Enable students to acquire the knowledge of various nanomaterials 2. a e researched and implemented to develop energy systems 3. Identify the urgency of energy solutions a

Contact Description of Topic C/D/I/O IOs Reference hours Session Unit I: Renewable and Nonrenewable Energy 9 Technology 1. Energy Challenge in the 21st Century 1 C 1-3 1-3 2. Nanotechnology in energy research 1 C 1-3 1-3 3. Conventional fossil fuels 1 C 2 1,2 4. Unconventional fossil fuels 1 C 2 1-3 5. Nanotechnology in fuel production 1 C 2 1-3 6. Renewable energy sources-photovoltaics 1 C 2 1-3 7. Hydrogen production - fuel cells- thermoelectricity 1 C 2 1-3 8. Advantages of renewable energy technologies 1 C 2,3 1-3 9. Implementation of renewable energy technologies 1 C 2,3 1-3 Unit II: Photovoltaics 9 10. Terrawatt challenges in photovoltaics 1 C 2 1,2 11. Limits in conversion efficiency 1 C 2 1,2 12. Hybrid concepts 1 C 2 1,2 13. Semiconductors optical properties 1 C 2 1,2 14. Optical absorption 1 C 2 1,2 15. Dye molecular engineering 1 C 2 1,2 16. Stable self-assembling dye 1 C 2 1,2 17. Monomolecular layer 1 C 2 1-2 18. The nanostructured semiconductors 1 C 2 1-2 Unit III: Thermoelectricity 8 19. Bulk thermoelectric materials 1 C 1-3 1-2 20. Bulk thermoelectric materials- size effects 1 C 1-3 1-2 21. Thermoelectric properties on nanoscale: modeling 1 C 1,2 1-2 22. Thermoelectric properties on nanoscale: metrology 1 C 1,2 1-2 23. Bi nanostructures, Silicon nanowire 1 C 1,2 1-2 24. Thermionics nanocomposites 1 C 1,2 1-2 25. Thermoelectric nanocomposites 1 C 1,2 1-2 Application of thermionic and thermoelectric 26. 1 C 1,2 1-2 nanocomposites Unit IV: Fuel Cells 8 27. Low temperature fuel cells 1 C 1-3 1-3 28. Cathode and anode reaction 1 C 1-3 1-3 29. Practical fuel cell catalysts and Electrolytes 1 C 2 1-3

100 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

30. High temperature fuel cells 1 C 1,2 1-3 31. High temperature ceramic electro catalysts 1 C 1,2 1-3 32. Application of high temperature ceramic electro catalysts 1 C 1,2 1-3 33. Solid oxide fuel cells (SOFCs) 1 C 1,2 1-3 34. Dry hydrocarbons in SOFC 1 C 1,2 1-3 Unit V: Hydrogen Production and Storage 8 35. Hydrogen energy transition 1 C 1-3 3 36. Semiconductor based hydrogen production 1 C 1-3 3 Nanomaterial based photoelectron chemical cell; 37. 1 C 1,2 1,3 Sensitization 38. Hydrogen storage: technological barriers 1 C 2 2,3 Hydrogen storage technology –potential storage materials- 39. 1 C 2 2,3 hydrogen sorption Properties of materials: physical storage, thermodynamic 40. 1 C 2 2,3 and kinetics 41. Nanostructured carbon, zeolites- clathrates- polymers 1 C 2,3 1-3 Metals and complex hydrides- chemical hydrides- 42. 1 C 2,3 1-3 nanocomposites Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books /Reference Books/Other Reading Material No. Javier Garcia-Martinez, “Nanotechnology for the Energy Challenge”, WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co., 1. 2010 2. Anatoli Korkin, David J, “Nanoscale Applications for Information and Energy Systems”, Springer, 2013 3. Darren P. Broom, “Hydrogen Storage materials: The characterization of their properties”, Springer, 2011

101 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT404E Photovoltaic Technology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose The course aims to educate students on the basic principles and design of photovoltaic cell technology

Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Acquire adequate knowledge on photovoltaic devices a c 2. Develop an understanding of the primary photovoltaic device technologies and their design a c e 3. Gain exposure to the various applications of photovoltaics a

Contact C-D-I- Description of Topic IOs Reference Session hours O Unit I: Introduction 9 1. Historical development; present and future global issues 1 C 1-3 1-4 2. Historical development; drivers- commercialization/economic factors 1 C 1-3 1-4 3. Basic components of PV systems 1 C 1-3 1-4 4. Types of PV systems 1 C 1-3 1-4 5. The solar spectrum 1 C 1-3 1-4 6. Terrestrial and space spectra; air mass (AM0, AM1.5) 1 C 1-3 1-4 7. 1st, generation photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1-4 8. 2nd generation photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1-4 9. 3rd generation photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1-4 Unit II: Semiconductor Properties For PV 9 10. Optical absorption and carrier photogeneration 1 C 1-3 1-4 11. Direct vs. indirect bandgaps 1 C 1-3 1-4 12. Minority carrier transport properties- Carrier recombination-lifetime and defects 1 C 1-3 1-4 13. Band to band and Shockley-Read-hall - High injection effects 1 C 1-3 1-5 14. Surface and interface recombination 1 C 1-3 1-4 15. PN homojunctions and carrier transport under broad spectrum illumination 1 C 1-3 1-4 16. Photocurrent and spectral response 1 C 1-3 1-4 17. Current transport models 1 C 1-3 1-4 18. Non-idealities and real PN diodes under illumination 1 C 1-3 1-4 Unit III: Solar Cell Design 8 19. Solar Cell parameters 1 C 1-3 1-5 20. Efficiency calculations (EFF, VOC, JSC) for ideal cells 1 C,D 1-3 1-4 21. Non-idealities: series resistance, shunt resistance 1 C 1-3 1-4 22. Optical loss mechanisms 1 C 1-3 1-4 23. Electrical loss mechanisms 1 C 1-3 1-4 24. Basics of solar cell device design 1 C 1-3 1-4 25. Lateral design and Vertical design 1 C 1-3 1-4 26. Optical versus electrical tradeoffs and optimization 1 C 1-3 1-4 Unit IV: Silicon and Thin Film Photovoltaic Cells 8 27. Si photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1 28. High efficiency single crystal Si PV designs 1 C,D 1-3 1 29. Polycrystalline/microcrystalline Si solar cells and Amorphous Si 1 C 1-3 1 30. Heterojunctions – review 1 C 1-3 1 31. Thin film II-VI and chalcopyrite photovoltaics 1 C 1-3 1 32. CdTe/CdS thin film cell technologies 1 C,D 1-3 1-4 33. CuInGaSe2/CdS thin film cell technologies 1 C,D 1-3 1-4 34. Dye-Sensitized solar cells 1 C 1-3 1-4

102 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Unit V: High Efficiency Photovoltaics 8 35. III-V multi-junction solar cells 1 C 1-3 1-4 36. Spectral splitting and the GaInP/GaAs/Ge triple junction solar cell 1 C 1-3 1-4 37. Bandgap profile optimization and solar spectrum matching 1 C,D 1-3 1-4 38. Tunnel junctions and current matching limitations 1 C,D 1-3 1-4 Concentrator photovoltaics (CPV)- Concentrator optics, cells and terrestrial 39. 1 C 1-3 1-4 CPV systems 40. Concentrator photovoltaics (CPV)- cells and terrestrial CPV systems 1 C 1-3 1-4 41. Space photovoltaics- radiation effects in semiconductors and solar cells 1 C,D 1-3 1-4 42. New concepts – quantum dots, wires, intermediate band, multiple exciton 1 C 1-3 1-4 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45 learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material Solanki C.S., “Solar photovoltaics - fundamentals, technologies and applications”, 3rd edition, PHI LearningPvt Ltd, 1 New Delhi, India 2 Fonash S.J., “Solar Cell Device Physics”, Academic, 2010 3 Moller H.J., “Semiconductors for Solar Cells”,Artech House, 1993 4 Green M.A., “Third Generation Photovoltaics: Advanced Solar Energy Conversion”, Springer, 2006

103 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT405E Nanotechnology in Cosmetics 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To provide knowledge about new trends in cosmetics, the types ofnanomaterials used in cosmetics and their Purpose properties as cosmetic agents Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Gain the knowledge in basics of nanotechnology in cosmetics a 2. Understand about the effects of using nanoparticles over conventional methods d 3. Acquire knowledge about current trends and future aspects in the field of cosmetics a 4. Pursue course and let work in a multi-disciplinary team environment c

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introduction to Cosmetics Technology 9 1. Introduction to cosmetics 1 C 1 1 2. Purposes and meaning of cosmetics 1 C 1 1 3. Cosmeceuticals 1 C 1 1 4. Classification of cosmetics 1 C 1 1 5. Quality characteristics 1 C 1 1 6. Quality assurance 1 C 1 1 7. Development process of cosmetics 1 C 1 1 8. Scientific background technology 1 C 1 1 9. Future trends 1 C 1 1 Unit II: Excipients & its Applications in Cosmetics 9 10. Oily materials: introduction, oils and fats, wax 1 C 1 1 11. Hydrocarbons, higher fatty acids 1 C 1 1 12. Higher alcohols, esters, silicones 1 C 1 1 13. Surface active agents : introduction anionic surfactant, cationic, surfactants 1 C 1 1 14. Amphoteric surfactant, non-ionic surfactant, other surfactants 1 C 1 1 15. Humectants : introduction, choice of humectants 1 C 1 1 16. Unusual humectants, special uses of humectants 1 C 1 1 Antioxidants : introduction, general oxidative theory, measurement of 17. 1 C 1 1 oxidation 18. Assessment of oxidant efficiency, choice of antioxidant 1 C 1 1 Unit III: Role of Polymers in Cosmetics 8 19. Film formers 1 C 2,4 2 20. Thickeners 1 C 2,4 2 21. Polymers in hair colouring 1 C 2,4 2 22. Conditioning polymers 1 C 2,4 2 23. Conditioning, cleansing 1 C 2,4 2 24. Silicones and emulsions 1 C 2,4 2 25. Types of polymeric systems 1 C 2,4 2 26. Stimuli responsive polymeric systems 1 C 2,4 2 Unit IV: Silicones 8 27. Multiple emulsions as novel delivery systems 1 C,D 2 3 28. Silicones and beyond 1 C 2 3 29. Organomodified silicones 1 C 2 3 30. New esters mimicking property for organomodified silicones 1 C 2 3 31. Silicones in shampoo 1 C 2 3 32. Minimalizing undesirable side effects 1 C 2 3 33. Substantive silicones and non-irritating silicones 1 C 2 3

104 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

34. Organomodified delivery systems - silicones personal care delivery system 1 C,D 2 3 Unit V: Case Studies 8 35. Dual nanodelivery systems- introduction 1 C 3 4 Synthesis of dual nanodelivery systems containing vitamin e for cosmetics 36. 1 C 3 4 and pharmaceuticals Characterization of dual nanodelivery systems containing vitamin e for 37. 1 C 3 4 cosmetics and pharmaceuticals Orthopedic implant titanium rods and Preparation of keratin coatings for 38. 1 C 3 4 orthopedic implant titanium rods 39. Characterization of keratin coatings for orthopedic implant titanium rods 1 C 3 4 40. Nanotherapeutics as a treatment for inflammation 1 C 3 5 41. Moisturization and fortification of the skin barrier 1 C 3 5 42. Beauty from contact lenses beyond vision correction 1 C 3 4 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. Mitsui T., “ New Cosmetic Science”, Elsevier, 1998 Reference Books/Other Reading Material Sarah E.M., Kathleen O.H., Robert Y.L., “Cosmetic Nanotechnology: Polymers and Colloids in Cosmetics”, American 2. Chemical Society, 2006 3. Meyer R.R., “Delivery System Handbook for Personal Care and Cosmetic Products”, William Andrew ASP, 2005 Sarah E.M., Kathleen O.H., Robert Y.L., “Cosmetic Nanotechnology: Polymers and Colloids in Cosmetics”, American 4. Chemical Society, 2006 Angelo L., Jamie R., and Adam J.F., “Nanotechnology, Inflammation and the Skin Barrier: Innovative Approaches for 5. Skin Health and Cosmetics”, Cosmetics, 2015

105 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT406E Green Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics & Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The purpose of this course is to introduce the novel concept of green manufacturing process and to enable students Purpose to tackle environmental problems in their chosen area of application. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be 1. Familiar with the field of traditional manufacturing to green manufacturing h 2. Familiar with various processing of sustainable green manufacturing techniques a 3. Understanding the different types of waste management a 4. Able to improve the knowledge about Industrial ecology c

Contact C-D-I- Description of Topic IOs Reference Session hours O Unit I: Green Manufacturing Trends 9 1. Green Manufacturing - Fundamentals and Applications 1 C 1 1 2. Basic definitions 1 C 1 1 Issues surrounding green manufacturing at the process, machine and 3. 1 C 1 1 system 4. Government motivations for green manufacturing 1 C 1 1 5. Traditional manufacturing to green manufacturing 1 C 1 1 6. Economic issues surrounding green manufacturing-External 1 C 1 1 7. Economic issues surrounding green manufacturing-Internal 1 C 1 1 8. Semiconductor and medical areas 1 C 1 2 9. Supply chain and packaging areas 1 C 1 2 Unit II: Sustainable Green Manufacturing 9 10. Green manufacturing sustainability - processes - requirements, and risk. 1 C 2 2 11. The sustainable lean and green audit process 1 C 2 2 12. International green manufacturing standards and compliance 1 C 2 2 13. International green manufacturing standards and compliance 1 C 2 2 14. Green rapid prototyping and rapid manufacturing 1 C,D 2 2 15. Green flexible automation 1 C 2 2 16. Green collaboration processes 1 C 2 2 17. Alternative energy resources 1 C 2 2 18. Sustainable green manufacturing system design 1 C,D 1,2 2 Unit III: Waste Management 8 19. Sustainability and global conditions 1 C 3 3 20. Material and solid waste management 1 C 3 3 21. Energy management 1 C 3 3 22. Chemical waste management and green chemistry 1 C 3,4 3 23. Climate change, air emissions management 1 C 3,4 3 24. Supply water and waste water management 1 C 3,4 3 25. Environmental business management 1 C 4 3 26. Present atmosphere and challenges 1 C 4 3 Unit IV: Industrial Ecology 8 27. Introduction - Material flows in chemical manufacturing - Industrial parks 1 C 4 5-9 28. Material flows in chemical manufacturing - Industrial parks 1 C 4 5-9 29. Assessing opportunities for waste exchanges 1 C 4 5-9 30. Assessing opportunities for by product synergies, Life cycle concepts 1 C 4 5-9 31. Product stewardship and green engineering 1 C 4 5-9 32. Regulatory, social and business environment for green manufacturing 1 C 4 5-9

106 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

33. Metrics and analytical tools - Green supply chains 1 C 4 5-9 34. Present state of green manufacturing 1 C 4 5-9 Unit V: Nanomaterials for "Green" Systems 8 35. Green materials, including biomaterials, biopolymers 1 C 2,4 4,6-9 36. Green materials, including bioplastics, and composites 1 C 2,4 4,6-9 Nanotech Materials for truly Sustainable Construction: Windows, 37. 1 C 2,4 6-9 Skylights, and Lighting Nanotech Materials for truly Sustainable Construction: Paints, Roofs, 38. 1 C 2,4 6-9 Walls, and Cooling 39. Multifunctional Gas Sensors and biomimetic Sensor 1 C 2,4 6 40. Multifunctional Optical Interference Sensors 1 C 2,4 6 41. Thermo-light responsive smart materials Nanomaterials 1 C 2,4 6 42. Stimulus-responsive smart materials Nanomaterials 1 C 2,4 6 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/ Reference Books/ Other Reading Material 1. David Dornfeld, “Green manufacturing fundamental and applications”, Prentice hall, 2002 2. Sammy Shinga G., “Green electronics design and manufacturing”, Prince Publications, 2008 3. Frank Kreith, George Tchobanoglous, “Solid waste management”, McGraw Hill, 2002 4. Stevens E.S., “Green plastics”, Princeton University press, 2002 5. Robert Ayres U., “A Handbook of Industrial Ecology”, Edward Elgar publishing, 2002 Ashby M.F., Daniel L. Schodek, “Nanomaterials, nanotechnologies and design: an introduction for engineers”, CRC 6. Press , 2010 7. David Allen T., David R.S., “Green engineering”, Prentice Hall NJ, 2002 8. James Clark, “Green chemistry”, Blackwell publishing, 2008 9. Paulo Davim,” Sustainable manufacturing”, Wiley publications, 2010

107 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT407E Nanocomputing 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Nanocomputing is a new and promising technology with the potential of exponentially powerful computation. Purpose Understanding basic concepts of nanocomputing and current state of research in this area is very essential. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the basic concept and its impacts on nanocomputing a 2. Understand the major advance in molecular, optical, biochemical computing a 3. Gain adequate knowledge in quantum computing e 4. Get familiarized with designing of parallel information processing machines e

Contact C-D-I- Session Description of Topic IOs Reference hours O Unit I: Nanocomputing Prospects and Challenges 9 1. History of computing, nanocomputing, quantum computers 1 C 1-4 1 2. Nanocomputing technologies 1 C 1 1 3. Alternative to transistor technology, quantum computing 1 C 1 1 4. Nano information processing 1 C 1 1 5. Prospects and challenges 1 C 1 1 6. Digital signals and gates 1 C 1 1 7. Silicon nanoelectronics 1 C 1 1 8. Carbon nanotube electronics 1 C 1 1 9. Carbon nanotube field effect transistors, nanocomputing 1 C 1 1 Unit II: Molecular and Optical Computing 9 10. Molecular computing 1 C 2 1 11. Origin of molecular computing 1 C 2 1 12. Molecular computing architecture 1 C 2 1 13. Challenges of molecular computing 1 C 2 1 14. Optical computing 1 C 2 1 15. Current use of optics for computing 1 C 2 1 16. Optical computing paradigms 1 C 2 1 17. Role of non-linear materials in nanocomputing 1 C 2 1 18. Photonic switches 1 C 2 1 Unit III: Biochemical Computing 8 19. Biological networks and neurons 1 C 2 2 20. Function of neuron cell on silicon 1 C 2 2 21. Modeling of neuron cells by VLSI circuits 1 C 2 2 22. Neural networks and distributed data processing 1 C 2 2 23. DNA computer 1 C 2 2 24. Information processing with chemical reactions 1 C 2 2 25. Nanomachines 1 C 3 2 26. Parallel Processing 1 C 3 2 Unit 4: Quantum Computing 8 27. Bit and Qubit 1 C 3 2 28. Superposition and entanglement 1 C 3 2 29. Quantum parallelisms, classical gates-reversible operations 1 C 3,4 2 30. Sqrt(NOT) operation-quantum algorithm 1 C 3 1 31. Challenges to large Quantum Computers 1 C 3 1 32. Fabrication, testing architectural challenges 1 C 3,4 1 33. Quantum dot cellular automata – computing with QCA 1 C 3,4 1 34. QCA clocking – QCA design rules 1 C,D 3 1 108 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Unit V: Parallel Architectures for Nanosystems 8 35. Mono and multiprocessor systems 1 C 4 2 36. Some considerations to parallel processing 1 C 4 2 37. Influence of delay time 1 C 4 2 38. Power dissipation 1 C 4 2 39. Architecture for processing in nanosystems: classic systolic arrays 1 C 4 2 40. Processor with large memory 1 C 4 2 41. Processor array with SIMD and PIP architectures 1 C 4 2 42. Reconfigurable computers, Teramac as a prototype 1 C 4 2 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material 1 Vishal Sahni and Debabrata Goswami, “Nanocomputing: The Future of Computing”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008 2 Karl Goser, Peter Glösekötter and Jan Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum devices”, Springer, 2005

109 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT408E Nanotechnology in Textiles 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of Nanomaterials based fabrics and their role Purpose in modern trends in nanotechnology. It will also guide the students to gain scientific understanding regarding the role of nanotechnology in the modern trend & textile Engineering Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to Understand scientific concepts underlying engineering and technological applications in 1. a Nano-textiles. 2. Understand the nanoparticles & nanofiber in design methodology in textiles a c h Study the characteristics and classification of the nano fabrics based material and their 3. a c role in modern trends in textile engineering. 4. Get familiarized with the new concepts of Nanotechnology based product in Textiles a c

Contact C-D-I- Description of Topic IOs Reference Session hours O Unit I: Nano Fibre Properties & Protection 9 1. Mechanical properties wet ability properties 1 C 1 1 2. Water absorption & storage properties 1 C 1 1 3. Appearance, air permeability 1 C 1 1 4. Electrical properties antistatic coating 1 C 1 1 5. Magnetic properties super 1 C 1 1 6. Paramagnetic coating 1 C 1 1 7. Improved wear resistance 1 C 1 1 8. Increased fire resistance or flame retardance 1 C 1 1 9. Barrier coatings, UV protection 1 C 1 1 Unit II: Nano Fibre Production & Improving Polymer Functionality 9 10. Electrospinning of Nanofibers 1 C 2 1,4 11. Producing nanofiber structures by electro spinning for tissue engineering, 1 C 2 1,4 Electrospun nanofiber spinning for tissue engineering, continuous yarns from 12. 1 C 2 1,4 electro spun nanofiber 13. Controlling the morphologies of electro spun nanofiber 1 C 2 1,4 14. Structures by electro spinning nanofiber 1 C 2 1,4 15. Producing nanofiber structures by electro spinning for tissue engineering 1 C 2 1,4 16. Nanostructuring polymers with cyclodextrins, nanocomposites 1 C 2 1,4 17. Dyeable polypropylene via nanotechnology 1 C 2 1,4 18. Polyolefin/clay nanocomposites 1 C 2 1,4 Unit III: Carbon Nanotubes and Nano Composites in Textiles 8 19. Structure and properties of carbon nanotube- reinforced polymer 1 C 2,3 3,4 20. Carbon nanotube and nanofiber reinforced polymer 1 C 2,3 3,4 21. Structure and properties of CNT 1 C 2,3 3,4 22. Polymer fiber using melt spinning 1 C 2,3 3,4 23. Multifunctional polymer nanocomposites for Industrial applications fibres 1 C 2,3 3,4 24. Industrial applications fibres and Multiwall carbon nanotube 1 C 2,3 3,4 25. Nylon-6 nanocomposites from polymerization 1 C 2,3 3,4 26. Nano-filled polypropylene fibers 1 C 2,3 3,4 Unit IV: Nanocoatings and Surface Modification Techniques 8 27. Nanotechnologies for coating, structuring of textiles 1 C 3 2,5 28. Electrostatic self assembled nanolayer films for cotton fibers 1 C 3 2,5 29. Nanofabrication of thin polymer films 1 C 3 2,5 30. Nanolayers for surface modification of fibers 1 C 3 2,5

110 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

31. Hybrid polymer nanolayers for surface modification of fibers 1 C 3 2,5 32. Structure relationships of polypropylene nanocomposite fibers. 1 C 3 2,5 33. Property relationships of polypropylene nanocomposite fibers. 1 C 3 2,5 34. Applications polypropylene nanocomposites fibers 1 C 3 2,5 Unit V: Nano Finishing in Textiles 8 35. UV resistant, antibacterial 1 C 4 5 36. Hydrophilic, self-cleaning 1 C 4 5 37. Oil & soil repellent, dyeing 1 C 4 5 38. Photo chromic coating, flame retardant 1 C 4 5 39. Finishes-wound dressings 1 C 4 5 40. Protective nanotextiles 1 C 4 5 41. Bullet proof vests 1 C 4 5 42. Applications of nanotextiles 1 C 4 5 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. Brown P.J., Stevens K., “Nanofiber and Nanotechnology in Textiles”, CRC Press, 2007 2. Mahltig B.,Textor T., “Nanosols & textiles”, World scientific, 2012 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. Mai Y-W., “Polymer Nano composites”, Wood head publishing, 2006 4. See ram Ramakrishna, “An introduction to electro spinning and Nanofibers”, World Scientific Publishing Co, 2005 5. Chang W.N., “Nanofiber fabrication, performance and applications”, Nova Science, 2009

111 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT409E Cancer Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

This course is intended to give the students an understanding of the principles of cancer biology by studying the Purpose molecular and cellular basis of cancer and the tools from nanotechnology for cancer diagnostic, therapeutic applications. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the biology behind cancer formation a 2. Know the various types of cancer and the genomics of them a c 3. Acquire knowledge about the role of nanotechnology in diagnostics and therapy of cancers d 4. Get acquainted with the current trend in cancer theranostics a c

Session Description of Topic Contact hours C-D-I-O IOs Reference Unit I: The Biology of Cancer 9 1. The nature of cancer 1 C 1 1 2. Tumor viruses 1 C 1 1 3. Cellular oncogenes 1 C 1 1 4. Growth factors 1 C 1 1 5. Growth factor receptors & cancer 1 C 1 1 6. Cytoplasmic signaling circuitry programs: cancer traits 1 C 1 1 7. Tumor suppressor genes Prb 1 C 1 1 8. Control of the cell cycle clock 1 C 1 1 9. P53 & apoptosis: master guardian and executioner 1 C 1 1 Unit II: Cancer Biotechnology 9 10. Cell immortalization 1 C 1,2 1 11. Tumorigenesis & cancer development 1 C 1,2 1 12. The biology of angiogenesis 1 C 1,2 1 13. Invasion & metastasis 1 C 1,2 1 14. Types of cancers 1 C 1,2 2 15. Stem cells and cancer 1 C 1,2 2 Molecular genetics of cancer: chemical modifications of chromatin- 16. 1 C 1,2 2 associated proteins 17. Genetic alterations in cancer cells: mutations 1 C 1,2 2 18. Chromosomal abnormalities 1 C 1,2 2 Unit III: Cancer Theranostics 8 19. Theranostic cancer biomarkers 1 C 3 3 20. Molecular imaging in cancer theranostics 1 C 3 3 21. Imaging-guided cancer therapy 1 C 3 3 22. Theranostic platforms, proteomics-based theranostics 1 C 3 3 23. Radionuclide imaging of cancer therapy 1 C 3 3 24. Bioluminescence imaging of cancer therapy 1 C 3 3 25. Magnetic resonance imaging of cancer therapy 1 C 3 3 26. Ultrasound imaging of cancer therapy 1 C 3 3 Unit IV: Nanotechnology in Cancer Diagnosis and Therapy 8 Magnetic nanoparticles as contrast agents for MRI application and 27. 1 C 3 1,3 therapeutic application 28. Ultrasound-responsive nanoparticles as drug and gene delivery carriers 1 C 3 1,3 29. Noble metal nanoparticle platform 1 C 3 1,3 Cancer theranostics with carbon-based nanoplatforms and silica 30. 1 C 3 1,3 nanoparticle platform 31. Polymer- and protein-based nanotechnologies for cancer theranostics 1 C 3 1,3

112 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

32. Scale-up production of theranostic nanoparticles 1 C 3 1,3 33. Market considerations 1 C 3 1,3 34. Nanotechnology and nanomedicine patenting systems 1 C 3 1,3 Unit V: Case Studies 8

35. Pancreatic cancer stem cells as new targets for diagnostics and therapy 1 C 3,4 4 36. Nanomedicine approaches for cancer stem cell targeting 1 C 3,4 4 Personalized cancer treatment and targeted iron oxide nanocomplex as a 37. 1 C 3,4 4 theranostic agent 38. Local cancer therapy with magnetic nanoparticles 1 C 3,4 4 Parameters influencing the efficacy of magnetic heating of small breast 39. 1 C 3,4 4 tumors Galectins as targets for novel and specific antibody therapies in 40. 1 C 3,4 4 gynecologic cancer therapies Glycans and mucins as targets for novel and specific antibody therapies 41. 1 C 3,4 4 in gynecologic cancer therapies 42. Commercial development of antibodies as drugs 1 C 3,4 4 Assessment 3

43. Cycle test I 1

44. Cycle test II 2

Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books, Reference Books/Other Reading Material 1. Robert A. Weinberg, “ The Biology of Cancer”, Garland Science, 2010 2. Raymond W. Ruddon, “Cancer Biology”, Oxford University press, 2007 3. Chen &Wong, “Cancer Theranostics”, Academic Press, 2014 4. Alexiou C. (Erlangen), “Nanomedicine - Basic and Clinical Applications in Diagnostics and Therapy”, Karger, 2011

113 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT410E Polymer Engineering 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanomaterials Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To study the aspects of processing, structure and properties of polymers needed in materials engineering designs Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Establish the engineering principles underlying the processing of polymer raw materials e 2. Provide understanding of underlying mechanisms of polymeric materials e 3. Extend and apply the knowledge of polymers to materials science and engineering d 4. Enhance knowledge about the various nanosynthesis techniques a

Contact Session Description of Topic C-D- I-O IOs Reference hours Unit I: Basics of Polymeric Materials 9 1. Historical background 1 C 1-4 1,2 2. Polymer synthesis and structure 1 C 1-4 1,2 3. Addition polymers, condensation polymers - Copolymers 1 C 1 2 4. Cross linked polymers , crosslinking plasticizers and fillers 1 C 1 2 5. Molecular symmetry and tendency to form crystal 1 C 1 1,2 6. Crystallinity, glass transition temperature 1 C 1 1,2 7. Distribution of relative molecular mass 1 C 1 1,2 8. Determination of number and average molecular weight 1 C 1 1,2 9. Gel permeation chromatography 1 C 1 1,2 Unit II: Mechanical Behaviour of Polymers 9 10. Deformation and fracture in polymers 1 C 1,2 1 11. Crack growth 1 C 1,2 1 12. Cyclic deformations 1 C 1,2 1 13. Entropy elasticity, elasticity of a network 1 C 1,2 1,2 14. Stress, strain behaviour of polymers 1 C 1,2 1,2 15. Engineering rubbers 1 C 1,2 1,2 16. Structure property relationships for rubbery polymers, shear modulus 1 C 1,2 1,2,3 17. Bulk modulus, Young’s modulus 1 C,D 1,2 1,2,3 Friction and wear in polymers, mechanical behavior of biomedical 18. 1 C 1,2 1,2,3 polymers Unit III: Polymer Viscoelasticity and Rheology 8 19. Nature of viscoelasticity, creep 1 C 3 1,2 20. Stress relaxation, dynamic properties, Zener model 1 C 3 1,2 21. Polymer selection, stiffness, temperature dependence 1 C 3 1,2 22. stress analysis, stress relaxation and creep 1 C 3 1,2 23. Relaxation and retardation times 1 C 3 1,2 24. The time - temperature superposition principle 1 C 3 1,2 25. Polymer melt viscosity, polymer rheology 1 C,D 3 1,2 26. Overview of viscoelasticity and rheology 1 C 3 1,2 Unit IV: Reinforced Polymers and Composites 8 27. Introduction , reinforced plastics 1 C 3 2 28. Polymer matrices , fibrous reinforcement 1 C 3 2 29. Forming of reinforced plastics, protrusion 1 C 3 2 30. Compression moulding, reinforced thermoplastics 1 C 3 2 Classification and characteristics of composite materials: fibrous 31. 1 C 3,4 4,5 composite materials 32. Laminated composite materials - particulate composite materials , 1 C 3,4 4,5

114 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

combinations of composite materials 33. Strength of composites , failure modes of long, fibre composites 1 C 3,4 5,4 Axial tensile failure, transverse tensile failure, shear failure - failure in 34. 1 C 3,4 5,4 compression Unit V: Elements of Design 8 35. Materials selection , the selection procedure 1 C 3,4 2,4 36. Engineering thermoplastics - thermosets and composites 1 C 3,4 2,4 37. Designing for manufacture 1 C,D 3,4 2,4 38. Injection moulding, joining and fastening 1 C 3,4 2,4 39. Thermosetting polymers 1 C 3,4 2,4 40. Designing for stiffness 1 C,D 3,4 2,4 41. Plastics,fibre composites 1 C 3,4 2,4 42. Rubbers, designing for strength 1 C,D 3,4 2,4 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material No 1 Sperling L.H., "Introduction to Physical Polymer Science", Wiley inter science, 2006 2 Mc Crum, “Principles of polymer Engineering”, Oxford, 2001 3 Bicerano J., “Prediction of Polymer Properties”, Marcel Dekker, 2002 4 Jones R.M., “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Taylor & Francis, 1999 HullD., and Clyne W., “An Introduction to Composite Materials”, Cambridge University Press, 1996 5 Course nature Theory Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Cycle test Cycle test Surprise Assessment tool Cycle Test III Quiz Total In-semester I II Test Weightage 10% 15% 15% 5% 5% 50% End semester examination Weightage : 50%

115 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 5NT411E Atomistic Modeling 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: 15NT205 Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The objective of this course is to make the learners understand various techniques and applications of atomic scale Purpose modeling. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand large-scale atomistic modeling techniques a 2. Know importance for solving problems in modern engineering sciences a e Demonstrate how atomistic modeling can be successfully applied to different fields of 3. a materials science Introduce all aspects of atomistic modeling of materials including direct experience with 4. a c simulations of classical energy models, Monte Carlo sampling techniques , etc.

Contact C-D- Description of Topic IOs Reference Session hours I-O Unit I: Basics of Modeling I 9 1. Classical mechanics, hamiltonians - coordinate systems 1 C 1 1,2 2. Potentials energy - basic pair potentials and their limitations 1 C 1 1,2 3. Calculation of elastic constants from potential function 1 C 1 1,2 4. Potentials for ionic systems, ceramics 1 C 1 1,2 5. Many -body potentials for metals 1 C 1 1,2 6. Many-body potentials for covalently bonded systems 1 C 1 1,2 7. Energy optimization 1 C 1 1,2,5,8 8. Molecular statics 1 C 1 1,2,5,8 9. Thermostatistics 1 C 1 1,2,5,8 Unit II: Basics of Modeling II 9 10. Setting up structures, key concepts: starting structure, electrons vs. nuclei 1 C 1 2,4 11. Born-Oppenheimer approximation, classical approximation 1 C 1 2,4 12. Pseudopotentials , K-points , Brillouin zone 1 C 1,2 2,4 13. K-point grids and Monkhorst-Pack mesh 1 C 1,2 2,4 14. Metals vs. insulators, symmetry, convergence and scaling with lattice parameters 1 C 1,2 2,4,7 15. Smearing of energy level occupations, optimization of electron density 1 C 1,2 2,4,7 16. The need for self-consistency 3 C 1,2 2,4,7 17. Optimization of structure, basis functions 1 C,D 1,2 2,4,7 18. Basis sets, energy cutoff, exchange-correlation function 1 C 1,2 2,4,7 Unit III: Molecular Dynamics 8 19. Integrating F=ma, time steps 1 C 3 2,3,7 20. The basic MD algorithm - The MD step 1 C 3 2,3,7 21. Taylor expansion, Verlet algorithms - choosing the time step 1 C 3 2,3,7 22. Predictor-corrector algorithm 1 C 3 1,2,3 23. MD in different ensembles, MD in constant temperature 1 C,D 3 1,2,3 24. Molecular dynamics in constant pressure 1 C 3 1,2,3 25. Energies: molecular statics 1 C 3 1,2,3 26. MD Simulation analysis -limitations 1 C 3 1,2,3 Unit IV: Monte Carlo Methods 8 27. Introduction - key concepts: starting structure - energy cutoff 1 C 4 1,2,3 28. State space sampling - classical momentum 1 C 4 1,2,3 29. Metropolis algorithm 1 C,D 4 1,2,7 30. Monte Carlo simulation analysis –limitations 1 C,D 4 1,2,7 31. Introducing ensemble sin MC, kinetic Monte Carlo 1 C 4 1,2,6,7 32. Key concepts: starting structure in MD, KMC 1 C,D 4 2,6,7

116 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

33. Convergence and scaling with lattice parameters 1 C 4 1,2,6,7 34. Understanding the electronic structure, electrical conductivity, excited electron states 1 C,D 4 2,6,7 Unit V: Density Functional Theory 8 35. Introduction to DFT, Kohn-Sham theorem 1 C 3,4 1,2,6,7 36. Exchange-correlation functions and LDA/GGA, accuracy of LDA/GGA 1 C,D 3,4 2,6,7 37. Basic output of QM code (energies, electronic structure), 1 C 3,4 1,2,6 38. Using the energies: molecular statics, MD, MC 1 C,D 3,4 1,2,6 39. Using the electronic structure: optical properties (transitions between electronic states) 1 C 3,4 1,2,6 40. Electrical conductivity (mobility of electrons, scattering of electrons between states) 1 C 3,4 1,2,6 Excited electron states due to thermal (or optical) excitations, Type of bonding - 41. 1 C 3,4 1,2,6 tunneling rates Understanding the electronic structure: wave functions, charge density, band structure, 42. 1 C,D 3,4 2,6,7 density of states Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books Jörg-Rüdiger Hill, Lalitha Subramanian and Amitesh Maiti, “Molecular modeling techniques in 1. material sciences”, Taylor & Francis/CRC Press: Boca Raton, 2005 2. Andrew R. Leach, “Molecular modelling: principles and application”, Pearson Education, India, 2001 Reference Books/Other Reading Material Daan Frenkel and Berend Smit, “Understanding molecular simulation: from algorithms to applications”, Academic 3. Press, 2001 David S. Sholl and Janice A. Steckel, “Density functional theory: a practical introduction”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 4. 2009 5. David Chandler, “Introduction to modern statistical mechanics”, Oxford University Press, 1987 6. Martin, R. “Electronic Structure: Basic Theory and Practical Methods”, Cambridge University Press, 2004 7. Thijssen, J.M. “Computational Physics”, Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 2000 8. Donald A. McQuarrie, “Statistical mechanics”, University Science Books, 2000

117 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT412E Societal Implications of Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category P Department Elective Nanotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

The goal of this course is to provide an insight into the fundamentals of ethical, social and political impact of Purpose nanotechnology. It will also guide the students to understand how Nanotechnology has broader societal implications and social challenges. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the basic knowledge on social, ethical & political impact of nanoscience and a c nanotechnology 2. Acquire the knowledge of various regulatory reactions to nanotechnology outcome f 3. Create awareness related to ethical issues in the future nanotechnology research h

Contact C-D- Description of Topic IOs Reference Session hours I-O Unit I: Economic Impacts and Commercialization of Nanotechnology 9 1. Introduction to societal implications of nanotechnology 1 C 1 1 2. Socio-economic impact of nanoscale science: initial results and nanobank 1 C 1 1 Managing the nanotechnology revolution: consider the malcolm baldrige 3. 1 C 1 1 national quality criteria 4. The emerging nanoeconomy: key drivers, challenges, and opportunities 1 C 1 1 5. Transcending Moore’s law with molecular electronics 1 C 1 1 6. Transcending Moore’s law with nanotechnology 1 C 1 1 7. Semiconductor scaling as a model for nanotechnology commercialization 1 C 1 1 8. Sustaining the impact of nanotechnology on productivity 1 C 1 1 9. Sustaining the impact of nanotechnology on sustainability, and equity 1 C 1 1 Unit II -Ethics, Law & Governance 9 10. Ethics and law 1 C 1,2 1 11. Ethical issues in nanoscience and nanotechnology: reflections and suggestions 1 C 1,2 1 Ethics and nano: a survey-law in a new frontier- an exploration of patent 12. 1 C 1,2 1 matters associated with nanotechnology 13. The ethics of ethics 1 C 1,2 1 14. Negotiations over quality of life in the nanotechnology initiative. Governance 1 C 1,2 1 15. Problems of governance of nanotechnology 1 C 1,2 1 Societal implications of emerging science and technologies: a research agenda 16. 1 C 1,2 1 for science and technology studies (STS) 17. Institutional impacts of government science initiatives 1 C 1,2 1 18. Nanotechnology for national security 1 C 1,2 1 Unit III- Social Scenarios 8 19. Introduction-social scenarios 1 C 1-3 2 20. Navigating nanotechnology through society 1 C 1-3 2 21. Nanotechnology, surveillance, and society 1 C 1-3 2 22. Methodological issues and innovations for social research 1 C 1-3 2 23. Nanotechnology: societal implications: individual perspectives 1 C 1-3 2 24. Nanotechnology and social trends; Five nanotech social scenarios 1 C 1-3 2 Technological revolutions and the limits of ethics in an age of 25. 1 C 1-3 2 commercialization 26. Vision, innovation, and policy 3 C 1-3 2 Unit IV: Converging Technologies 8 27. Introduction – converging technologies I C 1 2 28. Nanotechnology’s implications for the quality of life 1 C 1 2

118 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

29. Management of innovation for convergent technologies 1 C 1 2 30. The "integration/penetration model" 1 C 1 2 31. Social impacts of nanobiotechnology issues 1 C 1 2 The use of analogies for interdisciplinary research in the convergence of nano- 32. 1 C 1 2 , bio-, and information technology 33. Converging technologies: innovation, legal risks, and society 1 C 1 2 Short-term implications of convergence for scientific and engineering 34. 1 C 1 2 disciplines Unit V: Public Perceptions & Education 8 35. Public perceptions-societal implications of nanoscience 1 C 1,2 3 An agenda for public interaction research, Communicating nanotechnological 36. 1 C 1,2 3 risks 37. A proposal to advance understanding of nanotechnology’s social impacts 1 C 1,2 3 38. Nanotechnology in the media: a preliminary analysis 1 C 1,2 3 39. Public engagement with nanoscale science and engineering 1 C 1,2 3 Nanotechnology: moving beyond risk- communication streams and 40. 1 C 1,2 3 nanotechnology: the (Re) interpretation of a new technology nanotechnology 41. Societal implications- individual perspectives 1 C 1,2 3 42. Historical comparisons for anticipating public reactions to nanotechnology 1 C 1,2 3 Assessment 3 43. Cycle test I 1 44. Cycle test II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books/ Reference Books/Other Reading Material No. 1. Mihail C.R., and William S.B., “Nanotechnology: societal implications”, Springer publication, 2011 2. Ronald sandler, “Nanotechnology the Social & Ethical Issues”, Woodrow Wilson, 2009 3. Mihail C. Roco and William Sims Bainbridge,” Societal Implications of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, National Science Foundation, 2001

119 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT413E Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Departmnt Elective Nanobiotechnology Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To provide an understanding of basic principles of Tissue engineering and involvement of nanotechnology Purpose associated with repair or replacing portions of tissue or whole organ that is diseased or damaged. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the general scientific concepts of tissue engineering a 2. Know the various tissue culture techniques a c Acquire knowledge about the role of nanotechnology in tissue engineering and regenerative 3. d medicine 4. Get acquainted with the current trend in tissue engineering and regenerative technology a c

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Principles of Tissue Engineering 9 1. The Cell 1 C 1 1,2 2. Tissue types 1 C 1 1,2 3. Extracellular matrix 1 C 1 1,2 4. Emergence of tissue 1 C 1 1,2 5. Regeneration 1 C 1 1,2 6. Concept of tissue construction 1 C 1 1,2 7. Stem cells- types 1 C 1 1,2 8. Stem cells properties and source 1 C 1 1,2 9. Cell therapies 1 C 1 1,2 Unit II: Tissue Culture Basics 9 10. First Cultures: culture containers, media 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 11. Growth factors 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 12. Cell Culture Techniques: hybridomas 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 13. Cardiomyocites cultivation 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 14. Cryopreservation 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 15. Tissue culture: Migration 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 16. Tissue culture: new formation 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 17. Organ culture: principles 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 18. Formation of organ from tissue 1 C 1,2 1,2,4 Unit III: Nanobiomaterials and Tissue Engineering 8 19. Characteristics and design of biomaterials 1 C,D 3 2,3 20. Fundamental aspects of tissue responses to biomaterials 1 C 3 2,3 21. Types of tissue responses 1 C 3 2,3 22. Evaluation of biomaterial behavior 1 C 3 2,3 23. Properties of biomaterials assessed through in vivo experiments 1 C 3 2,3 Hydrogels- types of hydrogels used in tissue engineering and chitosan as 24. 1 C 3 2,3 biomaterial for tissue engineering Nanobiomaterials for regeneration: Carbon nanobomaterials, self assembling 25. 1 C 3 2,3 nanobomaterials 26. Polymeric and ceramic nanobiomaterials 1 C 3 2,3 Unit IV: Nanofibres in Tissue Engineering 8 27. Electrospinning: Experimental setup and basic principle 1 C 3 3,1 28. Effects of parameters on electrospinning 1 C 3 3,1 29. Biomedical Applications of electrospun nanofibres 1 C 3 3,1 30. Nanofibres as 3D scaffold for tissue regeneration 1 C 3 3,1 31. Nanofibre scaffolds for interface regeneration 1 C 3 3,1

120 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

32. Techniques to improve porosity and cell infiltration 1 C 3 3,1 33. Hybrid fibres for bone, ligament and tendon regeneration 1 C 3 3,1 34. Bioactive nanofibres, Methods for immobilizing biomolecules 1 C 3 3,1 Unit V – 3D Bio Printing For Scaffolds 8

35. 3D Bioprinting – introduction, principles 1 C 4 4 36. 3D Bioprinting technologies: ink jet based and pressure assisted bioprinting 1 C 4 4 37. Laser assisted and solenoid valve based 3D printing 1 C 4 4 38. Acoustic jet based 3D printing 1 C 4 4 39. Challenges and future development of 3D bio printing 1 C 4 4 40. CAM/CAD laser bio printing 1 C 4 4 41. Laser direct write for bioprinting 1 C 4 4 42. Materials used for bio printing, applications 1 C 4 4 Assessment 3

43. Cycle test I 1

44. Cycle test II 2

Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books Will W.M., Raimund Strehl, Karl Schumacher, “Tissue Engineering: From Cell Biology to Artificial Organs”, Wiley- 1. VCH, 2005 2. Ketul Popat,“Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering and Regenerative Medicine”, CRC Press/Taylor and Francis, 2011 3. Reference Books/Other Reading Material 4. Sabu Thomas, Yves Grohens, Neethu Ninan, “Nanotechnology applications for tissue engineering”, 2015 Lijie Grace Zhang, John P Fisher, Kam Leong,“3D Bioprinting and Nanotechnology in Tissue Engineering and 5. Regenerative medicine”, Elsevier, 2015 Antoniac (Ed.), IulianVasile (Ed.), “Biologically Responsive Biomaterials for Tissue Engineering”, SpringerSeries in 6. Biomaterials Science and Engineering, Vol.1, Springer, 2012.

121 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15NT318E Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / Codes/Standards NIL Course Category P Department Elective Nanoelelctronics Course designed by Department of Physics and Nanotechnology Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Nanoelectronics are emerging technologies with wide range of inter disciplinary applications. The major goals and Purpose objectives are to provide the fundamental principles of nanoelectronics and the utilization of nanostructures as nanoelectronic devices. Instructional Objectives STUDENT OUTCOMES At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Understand the Fundamentals of nanoelectronics a 2. Get insight on materials and fabrication of nanostructures. a e 3. Make the learner familiarize with concepts of electron transport in nanostructures. a e 4. Understand the working of various nanoelectronic devices a e

Contact C-D-I- Session Description of Topic IOs Reference hours O Unit I: Physics of Nanoelectronics 9 1. The changing landscape of micro/ nanoelectronics 1 C 1 1-3 2. The region of nanostructures 1 C 1 1-3 3. Beyond CMOS 1 C 1 1-3 4. More than Moore 1 C 1 1-3 5. Classical particles, classical waves 1 C 1 1-3 6. Wave–particle duality, Heisenberg uncertainty principle 1 C 1 1-3 7. Electrons behaving as waves (Schrödinger equation) 1 C 1 1-3 8. Scattering and bound states 1 C 1 1-3 9. Atoms to crystals- bands and bonds 1 C 1 1-3 Unit II: Materials and Fabrication of Nanostructures 9 10. Semiconductors 1 C 2 1-3 11. Semiconductor heterostructures 1 C 2 1-3 12. Lattice-matched heterostructures 1 C 2 1-3 13. Pseudomorphic heterostructures 1 C 2 1-3 14. Organic semiconductors 1 C 2 1-3 15. Carbon nanomaterials 1 C 2 1-3 16. Nanolithography 1 C 2 1-3 17. Etching 1 C 2 1-3 18. Other means forfabrication of nanostructures and nanodevices 1 C 2 1-3 Unit III: Electron Transport in Nanostructures 8 19. Time scales of the electrons in solids 1 C 3 1-3 20. length scales of the electrons in solids 1 C 3 1-3 21. Statistics of the electrons in solids and nanostructures :Classical 1 C 3 1-3 22. Statistics of the electrons in solids and nanostructures: Fermi 1 C 3 1-3 23. The density of states of electrons in nanostructures 1 C 3 1-3 24. Classical transport: classical resistance and conductance 1 C 3 1-3 25. Quantum ballistic transport: quantum Resistance and conductance 1 C 3 1-3 26. Transport of spin, spintronic devices and applications 1 C 3 1-3

122 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Unit IV: Tunneling Devices 8 27. Tunneling through a potential barrier 1 C 4 1-3 28. Potential energy profiles for material interfaces 1 C 4 1-3 29. Metal - insulator, metal - semiconductor 1 C 4 1-3 30. Metal – insulator - metal junctions 1 C 4 1-3 31. Tunneling diode (TD) and Resonant tunneling diode (RTD) 1 C 4 1-3 32. Three-terminal resonant tunneling devices 1 C 4 1-3 33. Technology of RTD 1 C 4 1-3 34. Inverter and logic OR gates based on RTD 1 C 4 1-3 Unit V: Single Electron and other Nanoelctronic Devices 8 35. Coulomb blockade 1 C 4 1-3 36. Tunnel junction excited by a current source 1 C 4 1-3 37. Performance of the single-electron transistor 1 C 4 1-3 38. SET technology and Field effect transistors 1 C 4 1-3 39. Carbon nanotube transistors (FETs and SETs) 1 C 4 1-3 40. Semiconductor nanowire SETs and FETs 1 C 4 1-3 41. Molecular SETs and molecular electronics 1 C 4 1-3 42. Quantum dot cellular automata 1 C 4 1-3 ASSESSMENT 3 43. Cycle test-I 1 44. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books/Reference Books/Other Reading Material Vladimir V. Mitin, Viatcheslav A. Kochelap, Michael A. Stroscio, “Introduction to Nanoelectronics: Science, 1. Nanotechnology, Engineering, and Applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2012 2. George W. Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Prentice Hall, 2007 3. Karl Goser, Peter GlÖsekötter, Jan Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems”, Springer, 2004

123 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15EI251 Electronics and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: NIL Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category E Engineering Sciences Electronics Engineering Course designed by Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- 2016

The aim of the course is to familiarize the student with the principle of operation, capabilities and limitation of Purpose Electronics and Instrumentation so that he will be able to use this knowledge effectively. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Design rectifiers and voltage stabilizer circuits a b e 2. Analyze various biasing methods of Transistor a 3. Know the usage of Semiconductor Devices for high power applications a b e 4. Understand the Basic of Measurement System a 5. Use of Primary sensing element and Signal Conditioning unit a e

Contact C-D- Description of Topic IOs Reference Session hours I-O Unit 1 Semiconductor Diode 9 Semiconductor diode – crystal diode as a rectifier – equivalent circuit of a 1. 2 C,D 1 1,3 crystal diode 2. Half wave rectifier – efficiency of half wave rectifier 2 C 1 1,3 3. Full wave rectifier – center tap full wave rectifier 1 C,D 1 1,3 4. Full wave bridge rectifier – efficiency of full wave bridge rectifier 2 C,D 1 1,3 Zener diode – equivalent circuit of Zener diode – Zener diode as a voltage 5. 2 C 1 1,3 regulator Unit II: Transistor and its Biasing 9 6. Transistor symbols – transistor as an amplifier – connections 2 C 2 1,4 7. CB, CE and CC characteristics – comparison of transistor connections 2 C 2 1,4 Transistor as an amplifier in CE arrangement – transistor load line analysis – 8. 2 C,D 2 1,4 operating point 9. CE Circuit - performance of transistor amplifier - cut off and saturation points 2 C 2 1,4 Transistor biasing: methods of transistor biasing - base resistor method - 10. 1 C,D 2 1,4 biasing with feedback resistor - voltage divider bias method . Unit III: FET, SCR AND UJT 8 11. Types of field effect transistor - JFET - working principles of JFET 2 C 3 1,5 12. JFET as an amplifier and its output characteristics - JFET applications 2 C 3 1,5 MOSFET working principle - SCR - equivalent circuit and V-I characteristics. 13. 3 C 3 1,5 scr as a half wave and full wave rectifier Application of SCR - TRIAC and DIAC characteristics and its applications, 14. 1 C 3 1,5 UJT - equivalent circuit of a UJT and its characteristics - tutorial Unit IV: Measurement System 8 Measurements and its significance, methods of measurements, classification 15. 4 C 4 2,8 of instruments and application Elements of a generalized measurement system, static and dynamic 16. characteristics of an instruments, Errors in measurement systems - units, 4 C,D 4 2,8 system, dimension and standards Unit V: Primary Sensing Elements and Signal Conditioning 8 Introduction - transducers - advantage of electric transducers, classification 17. 3 C 5 2,8 based upon principle of transduction Primary and secondary transducer, passive and active transducers, analog and 18. digital transducers, transducers and inverse transducers and examples for each. 3 C 5 2,8 Characteristics and choice of transducers 19. Input,transfer and output characteristics and its application. operational 2 C 5 2,8

124 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

amplifier, Characteristics of operational amplifier, basic filters, A/D converters. simple types Assessment 3 20. Cycle test-I 1 21. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. Mehta.V.K, and Rohit Metha, “Principles of Electronics”, S. Chand & Company Ltd., First Edition, 2010 2. Sawhney. A.K, “A Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai Sons, New Delhi, 2012 Reference Books/Other Reading Material 3. Millman and Halkias, “Electronic devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill International Edition, 2010 4. Mithal.G.K, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,2008 5. Salivahanan.S, Sureshkumar.N, and Vallavaraj.A, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw - Hill, New Delhi, 2011 6. Sze.S.M, “Semiconductor Devices - Physics and Technology”, 2nd Edtion, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2006 7. Ben G. Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, Pearson Education, 2009 8. Ernest O. Doebelin, “Measurement Systems - Application and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011

125 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15EI251L Electronics and Instrumentation Laboratory 0 0 2 1 Co-requisite: 15EI251 Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category E Engineering Sciences Electronics Engineering Course designed by Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

To develop skills in designing and conducting experiments related to applications of principles of physics in PURPOSE engineering Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Familiarize with the concepts and working of basic electronic components a b k 2. Understand the concepts of sensors a b k

Contact C-D- Sl. No. Description of experiments IOs Reference hours I-O 1. Characteristics of semiconductor diode & Zener diode 2 D,I 1 1,2 2. Characteristics of BJT in CE & CB Configuration 2 C,D 1 1,2 3. Characteristics of FET 2 D 1 1,2 4. Characteristics of SCR 2 D 1 1,2 5. Characteristics of DIAC & UJT 2 D 1 1,2 6. Characteristics of RTD 2 D,I 2 1,3 7. Characteristics of thermistor 2 D,I 2 1,3 8. Characteristics of thermocouple 2 D,I 2 1,3 9. Characteristics of load cell 2 D,I 2 1,3 10. Characteristics of strain gauge 2 D,I 2 1,3 Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 30

LEARNING RESOURCES Sl. REFERENCES No. 1. Laboratory Manual 2. VK Mehtha , “ Principles of Electronics”, S Chand; 7th Edition , 2005 3. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “Electrical Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai & Co, 2013

Course nature Practical Assessment Method (Weightage 100%) Assessment Experiments Record MCQ/Quiz/Viva Voce Model examination Total In-semester tool Weightage 40% 5% 5% 10% 60% End semester examination Weightage : 40%

126 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15ME216 Introduction to Manufacturing Engineering 2 0 0 2 Co-requisite: Nil Prerequisite: Nil Data Book / Codes/Standards Nil Course Category E Engineering Sciences Mechanical Engineering Course designed by Department of Mechanical Engineering Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 24th March 2016

To make the students aware of different manufacturing processes like machining process, metal forming, Purpose casting, welding and powder metallurgy. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes 1. To study the various machining processes. a c 2. To understand the concept of casting, welding and powder metallurgy. a c 3. To have the ability of understanding the mechanical working of metals. a c

Contact Description of Topic C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Machining 8 1. Introduction and description of lathe, types of lathes 1 C 1 1,2,3 2. Capstan and turret lathe, specification of a lathe 1 C 1 1,2,3 3. Lathe operations like step turning, facing parting off, taper turning, knurling 1 C 1 1,2,3 4. Description and principle of drilling 1 C 1 1,3 Drilling operations like reaming, counter boring, counter sinking, tapping, 5. 1 C 1 1,3 etc. 6. Types of drills and their features 1 C 1 1,3 7. Introduction, principle and classification of milling 1 C 1 1,2,3 8. Milling machine operations and tools with their features 1 C 1 1,2,3 Unit II: Casting, Welding And Powder Metallurgy 9 9. Introduction to casting 1 C 2 1,2,4,5 10. Types of pattern, pattern materials, pattern allowances 1 C 2 1,2,4,5 11. Types of moulding and moulding sand 1 C 2 1,2,4,5 12. Gating and risering, cores and core making 1 C 2 1,2,4,5 13. Shell, investment casting 1 C 2 1,2,4,5 14. Die casting, centrifugal casting 1 C 2 1,2,4,5 15. Special welding like laser welding, electron beam welding 1 C 2 1,4,5 Ultrasonic welding, electro slag welding, Friction welding, electrical 16. 1 C 2 1,4,5 resistance welding Principle of powder metallurgy, powder manufacture, Blending, compaction, 17. 1 C 2 1,2,4,5 sintering, finishing and applications Unit III: Metal Formimg 10 18. Hot and Cold Working and Rolling 1 C 3 1,2,6,7 19. Forging 1 C 3 1,2,6,7 20. Wire drawing 1 C 3 1,2,6,7 21. Extrusion and types like forward, backward and tube extrusion 1 C 3 1,2,6,7 22. Sheet metal operations like shearing, blanking 1 C 3 1,2,6,7 23. Piercing, punching, trimming, stretch forming 1 C 3 1,2,6,7 Bending with bending length and bending force calculations and simple 24. 1 C,D 3 1,2,6,7 problems Drawing with blank size calculation, draw ratio and drawing force 25. 1 C,D 3 1,2,6,7 calculations 26. Tube forming, Embossing and coining 1 C 3 1,2,6,7 27. Types of dies like progressive, compound and combination dies 1 C 3 1,2,6,7 Assessment 3 28. Cycle test-I 1 29. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 30

127 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

Learning Resources Sl. No. Text Books 1. Sharma P.C, "A Text Book of Production Engineering", S.Chand and Co. Ltd., 8thEdition, 2014 2. Rao.P.N, “Manufacturing Technology, Vol I & II”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 3rdEdition, 2010 REFERENCE BOOKS/OTHER READING MATERIAL Hajra Choudry S.K, Bose S.K, “Elements of Workshop Technology Vol II”, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 3. Mumbai, 2010 Kalpakjian, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Addison Wesley Congmen Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 4th Edition, 4. 2009 5. De Garmo et al., "Materials and Processes in Manufacturing", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,11thEdition, 2011 6. Jain. R. K., “Production Technology: Manufacturing Process”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 17th Edition, 2011 7. Chapman W. A. J., “Workshop Technology Vol. I and II”, Arnold Publisher, New Delhi, 2001

128 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15MH311 Elements of Mechatronics Systems 3 0 0 3 Co-requisite: 15MH312L - Mechatronics Systems Laboratory Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category E Engineering Sciences Mechatronics Engineering Course designed by Department of Mechatronics Engineering Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To impart the knowledge of elements of mechatronics systems in a structured way. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Explain the components of mechatronics systems a 2. Understand the nano electro mechanical systems and its fabrication techniques a d 3. Classify the sensors, actuators and apply them into various applications. a

Contact Description of Topics C-D-I-O IOs Reference Session hours Unit I: Introduction to Mechatronics Systems 7 1. Introduction to mechatronics systems 1 C 1 1 2. Key elements of mechatronics systems 2 C 1 1 3. Measurement Systems: ADC and DAC 1 C 1 1 4. Operation of open and closed loop systems 1 C 1 1 5. Water level control and shaft speed control 1 C 1 1 6. Washing machine control 1 C 1 1 Unit II: Nanoelectromechanical Systems (NEMS) 7 7. Overview of micro and nanoelectromechanical systems 1 C 2 2 8. NEMS: Fabrication techniques 2 C 2 2 9. NEMS / MEMS: Motion dynamics 2 C,D 2 2 10. NEMS: Devices and applications 2 C 2 2 Unit III: Sensors 11 11. Resistive sensors: Types, working principles 1 C 1,3 1 12. Capacitive sensors: Types, working principles 1 C 1,3 1 13. Inductive transducers: Types, working principle 1 C 1,3 1 14. Nano sensor: Parameters and characteristics 1 C 1,3 3 15. Necessity of nano scale measurements, classification of nanosensors 1 C 1,3 3 16. Magneto resistance nano sensor, Hall effect 1 C 1,3 3 17. NEMS accelerometer, silicon nanowire accelerometer 1 C 1,3 3 Optical displacement nano sensor, magneto motive displacement nano 18. 2 C 1,3 3 sensor 19. Piezoresistive and piezoelectric displacement nanosensor 1 C 1,3 3 20. Carbon nanowire on diamond resistive temperature nanosensor 1 C 1,3 3 Unit IV: Electrical Drives 9 21. DC motor: Construction, working principle and characteristics 2 C 1,3 1 22. Solenoids and relay : Construction, working principle and applications 1 C 1,3 1 23. Stepper motors: Construction, working principle, types and applications 2 C 1,3 1 24. Servo motors : Construction, working principle, types and applications 2 C 1,3 1 25. Piezo resistive and piezo electric actuators 2 C 1,3 3 Unit V: Applications of Mechatronics Systems 8 26. Car park barriers 1 C 1,2,3 4 27. Bar code reader 2 C 1,2,3 4 28. Coin counting machine 1 C 1,2,3 4 29. Nano robots: Past, present and future 1 C 1,3 1 30. Nano mechanical cantilever based manipulation for sensing and imaging, 1 C 1,3 1 31. Swam of self organized nano robots 2 C 1,3 1 Assessment 3

129 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

32. Cycle test-I 1 33. Cycle test-II 2 Total contact hours 45

Learning Resources Sl. Text Books No. 1. Bolton, W., “Mechatronics”, Addison Wesley, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 1999 2. Vinod Kumar Khanna., “Nanosensors: Physical, Chemical and Biological”, CRC press, 2012 Reference Books / Other Reading Materials 3. Gabor L. Hornyak., John J. Moore., H.F. Tibbals, Joydeep Dutta., “Fundamentals of Nanotechnology”, CRC Press, 2009 4. Constantinos Mavroidis., Antoine Ferreira., “Nanorobotics: Current Approaches and Techniques”, Springer 2013

130 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015

L T P C 15MH312L Mechatronics Systems Laboratory 0 0 2 1 Co-requisite: 15MH311 Prerequisite: NIL Data Book / NIL Codes/Standards Course Category E Engineering Sciences Mechatronics Engineering Course designed by Department of Mechatronics Engineering Approval -- Academic Council Meeting -- , 2016

Purpose To impart knowledge of understanding the characteristics of key elements of mechatronics system. Instructional Objectives Student Outcomes At the end of the course, student will be able to 1. Recall the key elements of mechatronics system a 2. Analyze the characteristics of various sensors a b 3. Apply the sensors and actuators into various applications a

Sl. Contact C-D-I- Description of experiments IOs Reference No. hours O 1. Introduction to Labview (Simple Labview programs) 2 C 1 1 2. Introduction to Labview (Usage of loops, structures) 2 C 1 1 Calibration of strain gauge, infrared sensor and sonar sensor (Quanser 3. 2 C,I,O 2 1 QNET) 4. Calibration of pressure sensor ad potentiometer (Quanser - QNET) 2 C,I,O 2 1 Calibration of magnetic field sensor, temperature sensor and piezo film 5. 2 C,I,O 2 1 sensor (Quanser QNET) Determination the performance characteristics of analog to digital 6. 2 I,O 1 1 converter (3 bit and 4 bit converters) Determination of performance characteristics of digital to analog 7. 2 I,O 1 1 characteristics (unipolar, bipolar-3bit converter) 8. Coin operated car park barrier using electro pneumatic 2 D,I,O 3 1 9. Machine vision system 2 C,D,I,O 2 1 10. DC motor control (Quanser QNET) 2 C,I,O 3 1 Performance characteristics of (K, J Type) thermocouple using 11. 2 C 2 1 multifunctional DAC card (Test rig) Measurement of thermal conductivity using multifunctional DAC card 12. 2 C 2 1 (Test rig) Total contact hours (including demo and repeat labs) 30

Learning Resources Sl. References No. 1 Mechatronics Laboratory Course Material, 2016

131 NT-Engg&Tech-SRM-2015